#'^i 




-it. 



'<i\ 



■^Vl ■^•XEKCISES 



VV/.lU 



EDITION 















^^^5^3 




Class 



Rnnk ./\ g g 



^4-4-- 



SELECT 



LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS 



PUBLISHED BY 

SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, & Co. 

Allison's First Lessons in English Grammar. 18mo. 9d. 
Allison's Child's French Friend. 18mo. 2s. 
Allison's La Petite Fran^aise : Vocabulary, &c. 18mo. 2s. 
Arnold's Henry's First Latin Book. 1 2mo. 3s. 
Baldwin's History of England. 12mo. 3s. 6d. 
Baldwin's Outlines of English History. 18mo. Is. 
Bellenger's French and English Conversation. 1 2mo. 2s. 6d. 
Binns' Exercises in False English. 12mo. Is. 6d. 
Bland's Latin Hexameters and Pentameters. 12mo. 3s. 
Bond's View of Ancient Geography, an Introduction to Butler's 

Ancient Geography. Oblong, 7 Maps, 2 Parts. 4s. 6d. 
Bos worth's Introduction to Latin Construing. 12mo. 2s. 6d. 
Bos worth's Latin Construing. 12rao. 2s. 6d. 
Bosworth'sEtonGreekGrammar,withEng. Notes. 12mo. 4s. 
Bosworth's Compendious Grammar of the Primitive English 

or Anglo-Saxon Language. 8vo. 5s. 
Bruce's Geography and Astronomy. 12mo. 6s. 
Butler's Questions in Eoman History. 12mo. 5s. 6d. 
Butler's Geography of the Globe, by Rowbotham. 1 2mo 4s. 6d. 
Carey's Latin Versification Simplified. 15mo. 2s. 
Caesar de Bello Gallico. J. Christison. 12 mo. 4s. 
Caasar's Commentaries, translated by Duncan. I2mo. 7s. 
Chambaud's Fables Choisies, par Wells. I8mo. 2s. 
Ciceronis de Officiis LibriTres. G.Ferguson. 18mo. Is. Gd. 
Cobbin's Grammatical and Pronouncing Spelling-Book. 

12mo. Is. 6d. 
Cobbin's Classical English Vocabulary. 12mo. 3s. 
Cobbin's Instructive Reader, wath Cuts. 12mo. 3s. 
Crabb's English Synonymes Explained. 8v.). 15s. 
Crombie's Etymology and Syntax. 8vo. 7s. 6d. 
Crombie's Gymnasium, sive Symbola Critica. 12mo. Gs. 
Cowie's Questions on Ditto. 12mo. 2s. Gd. 
Crombie's Gymnasium, enlarged, 2 vols, 8vo. 21s. 
Crombie's Clavis Gymnasii. 8vo. 6s. 
Douville's Speaking French Grammar. Crown 8vo. 7s. Gd. 
Edward's Accented Eton Latin Grammar. 12mo. 2s. Gd. 
Edward's Eton Latin Accidence. 12mo. Is. 
Edward's Latin Delectus. 12mo. 2s. 6d. 
Edward's Sententise Selectse. 12mo. 2s. 6d. 



Irv 



.X3^X;* 



Simpkin, Marshall, and Go's Select List of Scbool Boot^ 

Edwards' Exempla Graeca Minora. 12mo. 2s. 6d. 
Edwards' Greek Delectus. 12mo. 3s. 6d. 
j Edwards' Odes of Anacreon ; literally translated. 12mo. 6s. 
Euripides' Medea, Phoenissae, Hecuba, and Orestes, Porson's 

Text, with literal Ti'anslation into English Prose, and 

Index to the Medea, by T. W. C. Edwards, M.A. 8vo, 

£l; or, separately, 5s. each. 

By the same Author, and on the same plan, 8vo. 5s. each. 

1. The Prometheus Chained ofiEscliylus,Blomtield's Text. 

2. The Antigone of Sophocles, Bruuck's Text. 

3. The Philoctetes of Sophocles, Brunck's Text. 

4. The Alcestis of Euripides, Monk's Text. 

5. The QEdipus Rex of Sophocles, Brunck's Text. 
Grandineau's Gramrnaire Royale. 8vo. 7s. 
Greig's Young Ladies' Arithmetic. 12mo. 2s. 
Hassell's Camera, or ArtofDrawingin Water Colours. 8vo- 5s. 
Hewlett's (Mrs) Modern Speaker. 18mo. 4s. 
Hodgkiti's Sketch of the Greek Accidence. 8vo. 2s. 6d. 
Hook's Key to the Greek Testament. 12mo. 3s. 6d. 
Jacobs' Latin Reader. 12mo. Part 1, 2s. 6d. ; Part 2, 38. 
Jordan's German Writing Copies. Oblong. Is. 6d. 

T\Juigne's Table of French Verbs. On a large sheet. 3s. 
^^e Nouveau Testament, large print. 12mo. 4s. 

Mair's Introduction to Latin Syntax. 12mo. 3s. 

Mair's Tyro's Latin Dictionary. 12mo. 7s. 

Martinelli's Italian and French Dictionary. Small 8vo. 10s. 6d. 

Phaedrus, Latin Text. 18mo. Is. 6d. 

Phsedrus, Construed, for Grammar Schools. 12mo. 3s. 
j Schrevelius' Greek and English Lexicon (Valpy's). 8vo. 15s 

Tayler's Eton Greek Grammar, literally translated into 
English. 12mo. 4s. 

Taylor's System of Stenography, fcp. 3s. 

Trimmer's History of England, by Milner. fcp. 5s. 

Virgil's Bucolics, Heyne's Text, with literal Translation into 
English Prose, by T.W. C.Edwards, M.A. Lnp. 8vo. 8s. 

White's (Rev. J.) Tutor's Expeditious Assistant 12mo. 2s. 

White's Elucidation of Ditto. 12mo. 4s. 6d. 

White's Mental Arithmetic. 12mo. 3s. 6d. 

Wilcke's Method of acqui ring French and Italian Pr- 
nunciation. 12mo. 2s. 

Yeates' Hebrew Grammar, by Bialloblotzky. Royal 8vo. 5s. 

Zotti's Table of Italian Verbs, by C. Bruno. On sheet. 3s. 

S., M., & Go's CorPLETE Schooi> Catalogue may be had gratis. 



J. Wertheimer <k Co,, Printers, Circus Place. London Wall. 



<^X^X^X^X3^X^X3^X^X^X3^X^X:^X^X^>- 
^X^X^X^X^X^X^X}^X^X^X^X^X^X}^X:^ 



:v*'i?iV",y'i'V''i&*v'fc«i"V'iJi'V*i&'\^^^^ 



K^X^X^X}^X^X^X^X^Xi^Xi^X;^/^^/\;^/^;^/s. 
^X^X^X^X^X^X^X}^X^X3^X^X^X^X^X^. 
<^X^X^X^X!^X}^X^X^X^X3^X^X^X^X^X, 
^X^X^X}^X^X)^X^XMX3^X^X^X^X^X^X^! 



<'^X^X^X^X^X'^XMX^XMX^X^X^X^X^X 
■^XMX3^X^X^X3^X}^X]^X}^X^X!^X^X^X¥X^ 
<^x^x^x}^x^x^x^x3^x¥x¥x] 
^x^x^x3^x^x^x^x^x^x^x^! 
x}^xmx^x^x^x}^x}^xmx3^xmx^x^x^x3^x: 
ck^x^x^x^x}^x^x^x3^xi^x^x^x^x¥xm! 
x^x^x3^x]^x3^x}^x!^x}^x3^x)^x!^x^x^x^x^ 
mX^XMX}^X3^XMX^X3^X^X3^XJ^X3^X!^X^X^! 
x^xmx3^x^x^x^x!^x!^x3^x}^x^x!^x}^x}^x! 
!}^x}^x!^xj^x3^x^xj^x!^x^x!^x1^x]^x^x^xs^! 

^x!^x^x!^x!^x;^x}^x}^x3^x^x3^x}^x3^x^x^! 

X^X^X3^X!^Xi^X}^X}^X}^X3^X}^X}^X^X^X^X! 

^X^X^X?^X^X!^X!^X 

)O^X}^X}^X!^X}^Xi^X}^X^X}^X!^Xi^X3^X^X^X! 

'KXMX^X^X}^XJ*:X}^X!^X]^X}^XJJ^X!^X3^X^X}^! 

'X^XMX}^X^X^X}^X^X^X^X^X!^X)8^X!^X}^X! 

X3^X^X3^X3^X!^X}^X}^X}^X}^Xi^X^XJ^X^X3^X! 
J^X^X^X^^XJ^X^^X-^XJ^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^] 
X^X^X}^X}^X}^X3^X}^X}^X5^X5^X}^X5^X^X^X1 

^x^x}^x}^x^x}^x;^x;^xi^x^x}^x^x^x¥X^] 

X5^X3^X^X^X}^X)J^X}^X}^X^X^XJi^X!^X3^X^X: 
}^X!^X^X^X^X}^X!^X!^X!^X}^X3^X}^X!^X^X^] 

::• ^Z*^? '•••^\' v'*^' •"•^••- '^^ 

lAl i^*il %v* ^t^ \y* Ixtjl ••-.•' ^fjl *••■•* ^t^ '•..•' ^♦'i' '% .'' 'itlsl' \y' I^il* '•• ••'* i;ti *•• •• ^^^ *•••*' Bt^il *'•.'*' i^^ **•.•'* la-'il ••-•**' ^■:L '••*••*' < 
,.?(P,.%^._y\.?«'*..'\_*%?^ ..••., y**?^^.-',. %? ..••.. %^ ..••.. %? ..-•., ?J? ..••,. %?,..•% ?«?..••*•. ^«? .••"'. ?«?,.••••• ?«?..••••, ?«? .••*•. I 

.•^...' \.^^...' \.?i?. .••'•. .?«?. ••••.. y^, .•••'. %■'? .••'•. ?»? •••••- %'^. .••••• ?*^ ••"•. ,%?. ••• '. ?»^ .••••• ?*?. .••'-. .?«^. .••••. S? .••••• ?«? i 

'^X}^X}^X^X^XJ^X}^X^X}^X^X^Xi^X}^XJ^X^> 
X^X^X^X!^X^X3^X}^X!^X3^XMX}^X!^X3^X^X} 
^X}^X}^X^X3^X!^X^X^X^X^X}^X!^XJ^X^X!^^ 



«, 



■'■■^f"' 



DR. ALLEN'S 
CONSTRUCTIVE EXERCISES, 

Sfc. 






DR. ALLEN'S 
CONSTRUCTIVE EXEECISES 



TEACHING GREEK 



FROM THE COMMENCEMENT BY WRITING. 



SBCOKTD EDZTZOir, 

REVISED AND CONSIDERABLY ENLARGED. 
BY 

JOHN ROBSON, B.A., Lond. 

MEMBER OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, AND ASSISTANT MASTER 
IN UNIVERSITY COLLEGE SCHOOL. 



LONDON: 

PRINTED FOR TAYLOR AND WALTON, 

BOOKSELLERS AND PUBLISHERS TO UNIVERSITY COLLEGE, 

28, UPPER GOWER STREET. 



1844. 






Printed by J. & H. Cox, Brothers (late Cox & Sons), 
74 & 75, Great Queen-street, Lincoln's-Inn Fields. 



PREFACE, 



The following work was originally composed on 
the principle that inflexions may be more easily 
committed to memory through the medium of 
writing exercises, than by reading over lists of 
forms in the pages of a grammar ; especially when 
the terminations are exhibited apart from the root 
to which they are affixed, and made the subjects 
of distinct rules. By these means the pupil is 
trained to some degree of generalization, a process 
very much more agreeable to most minds than 
the tedious drudgery of learning by rote lists of 
words, and the results of which are far more 
readily retained in the memory. Besides, on this 
plan each suffix is taken separately, its meaning 
is fully explained, and abundant practice in its use 
is afforded ; whereas on the common system, the 
learner is presented with a great variety of suf- 
fixes all together, and their significations are very 
imperfectly explained : the consequences are, that 
one termination is confounded with another, and 
no clear notion is obtained of their respective 
h 



VI PREFACE. 

meanings. It may even be doubted whether the 
majority of boys ever think of separating the root 
from the suffix : each case or person is looked 
upon as an indivisible vi^hole, the meaning of 
which must be learned by itself; and as this is to 
be done with many hundred inflexions, it is no 
wonder that boys generally make so little pro- 
gress either in Latin or Greek. Without gene- 
ralization, the result of analysis and comparison, 
it is vain to expect that a knowledge of any lan- 
guage can be acquired ; and this process must be 
performed by each student for himself — under 
the guidance and with the assistance of others, 
doubtless — but still consciously and intelligently, 
not as a mere repeater of rules laid down by 
others. 

It is obvious that another very important ad- 
vantage to be derived from using such a work 
as the present is, that while the pupil is learning 
the accidence he is at the same time acquiring a 
stock of words, which will prove of the greatest 
service when he commences reading the Greek 
authors : the principal difficulty at this time ordi- 
narily is, that all the words being unknown, not 
only is the labour of looking for them in the 
lexicon very great and discouraging, but as no 
general notion can be formed of the meaning 



PREFACE. Vll 

of any given sentence previously to using the 
lexicon, the pupil has nothing to guide him 
in the selection of the signification borne by 
any word in the given instance from among the 
various meanings probably assigned to it in the 
lexicon. Whereas if several of the words were 
known to him, the labour of translating would be 
diminished in the two ways just indicated, and 
the task would become comparatively pleasurable. 
In the course of this work, upwards of 1,500 Greek 
words will have to be used, most of them repeat- 
edly ; and they are generally words of common 
occurrence ; so that any one who shall write the 
whole of the exercises will afterwards find but little 
difficulty in translating a simple Greek book, 
especially Xenophon's Anabasis, a considerable 
number of the sentences being taken from that 
work. In University College School the plan of 
teaching Greek is to begin with this book, and 
then to read the Anabasis, using Mr. Hardy's 
lexicon to the first six chapters: it has been 
found that after this few boys experience much 
trouble in mastering the Anabasis, when left to 
translate it with the aid of an ordinary lexicon. 

This work is written on what is called the 
Crude Form system : that is, the Greek words in 
the vocabulary are not given in any case or 



VIU PREFACE. 

person, but in their simple uninflected stat{3, which 
is their " Crude Form." The advantages of this 
plan over the old one of taking the nominative 
singular of nouns and the first person singular 
present indicative of verbs, as the forms from 
which the others are derived, are so obvious that 
it is really surprising that it has not spread more 
rapidly in this country. It is the only plan on 
which the analytical mode of teaching Greek or 
Latin can be founded ; it greatly simplifies the 
rules of inflexion ; it avoids the false and arbitrary 
notion of deriving one case or tense, &c., from 
another ; it renders easy the explanation of many 
apparent anomalies and irregularities; and finally, 
is of the greatest value in shewing the connection 
and derivation of words, not only of Greek words 
with and from other Greek words, but also of 
English derivatives from the Greek. 

It has been objected to the Crude Form 
system that it is " arbitrary." Of all objections 
this is the least applicable to it. Those who 
make it seem to suppose that a particular form is 
invented and called the crude form or root, merely 
because it happens to be a convenient one from 
which to derive the cases and tenses : now it is 
quite true that, as a general rule, the various in- 
flexions are easily made from the Crude Form ; 



PREFACE. IX 



this is a proof of the correctness and advantage 
of the system ; but the process by which the^ 
Crude Form is found is very different from that "^ _ 
of " mvention : it consists in a comparison oi all; ^^ 
the words of common origin, for the purpose, if /^^ ^ 
possible, of finding the root freed from any com-l-^ 
bination which might occasion a change in itsl 
original form, and that is called the Crude Forniy 
Thus to determine the Crude Form of jSXaTrrw — 
which, a priori, may be either j3Xa7r, j3Xaj3, or 
/3Xa(^ — it is of no use to refer to the future f3Xa\p(jj, 
to the perfect active f3£J3Xa(l>af to the perfect 
passive fi^piXanfiai, or to the first aorist passive 
£fd\a(j)Oriv ; since in all these words certain suffixes 
are added to the root which necessitate various 
changes in it, and these changes would be the 
same whether the root ended in tt, |3, or 0. But 
the second aorist passive, tjSXa/Brjv, has a suffix 
which begins with a vowel, so that no change in 
the root is required ; manifestly, then, the root is 
j3Xa/3. This conclusion is confirmed by com- 
paring cognate words, j3Xaj3-a ' hurt,' j3Xa/3-£/oo 
' hurtful,' a-j3Xaj3-£c * harmless,' &c. &:c. 

However inapplicable the term *' arbitrary " 

may be to the Crude Form plan, it is undoubtedly 

true enough of the old one, which consisted in 

selecting some particular case or person, and by 

b 2 



X PREFACE. 

various complicated rules, manufacturing from 
them other cases, persons, and tenses. No- 
thing can, at the same time, be more absurd 
than some of these ingenious contrivances. Thus 
in the Port Royal Greek Grammar (Nugent's 
Translation, Rule LXIII.) we are told that " the 
paulo'post future passive is formed from the 2nd 
person singular of the perfect by inserting oju be- 
fore m; ^^jTiTVfXfxai, rervxpat, Terv-ipofim"! There 
the rule stops : so important in the eyes of the 
old grammarians was the first person singular, 
that they were content with giving rules for its 
formation — the other five persons took their 
chance, or were to be learned from the " example." 
Similarly with the nouns : the nominative sin- 
gular is in reality the worst case that could have 
been chosen as that from which to form the 
others ; because the suffix of that case generally 
being f, whenever the Crude Form ends in a 
consonant the g causes that consonant to be 
changed, so as to obscure the real root ; and even 
where g is not added, the Crude Form almost 
always undergoes some change in this case : 
whereas the other cases generally contain the 
root in its proper form. How can a pupil 
know that the genitive singular of Kopa^ is 
KO/QOfc-oc, of Of?, aiy-oQ, and of j3i??, j^rjx-oc^ 



PREFACE. XI 

The nominative singular, in all three instances, 
ends in 5, and there is nothing whatever to guide 
him in forming the other cases from it. But if 
the Crude Forms, KopaK, aiy, and jSrjx, were given, 
he could easily derive from them every one of the 
cases, the nom. sing, included; for he would have 
learned, as a universal rule of the language, that 
KQf jQj and ^c are all written and pronounced ?. 
Illustrations of this kind might be multiplied ad 
infinitum were they necessary. 

Some persons may object to using any school 
book written on the Crude Form system, on the 
ground that there are no Greek grammars nor 
lexicons in our language composed on that plan ; 
but this difficulty may be ea&ily got over. All that 
is necessary to enable the pupil to use books of 
both sorts is, to point out that nouns, &c. whose 
Crude Forms end in a, correspond to the first 
declension of the grammars ; those ending in o to 
the second ; and that all others belong to the 
third : that verbs ending in a, e, and o are the 
Contract verbs of the grammars; and that those 
ending in any consonant, l or v, are the Barytone 
verbs. This short and simple explanation is suffi- 
cient to shew the connection between the two 
systems, and to enable the scholar to convert 
the terms of the one into those of the other. 



Xll PREFACE. 

These exercises are called constructive,* in refer- 
ence to the application of the synthetical prin- 
ciple to the formation of words, as well as of sen- 
tences. The word writing is used in the title- 
page in the sense of making sentences, as well as 
of committing them to paper. 

Having thus explained the general principles 
on which the work was originally composed, and 
which have been carefully retained in the present 
edition, it remains to state the changes introduced 
into it. 

The principal of these is the addition of rules 
and exercises on the Contract verbs, and on the 
subjunctive, optative, and imperative moods ; 
which were altogether omitted in the first edition. 
It was thouoht that as the book is intended to 

o 

be an introduction to the reading of the Greek 
authors, it could not be considered as effecting 
its object while forms of such constant occur- 
rence were omitted from it. In the exercises on 
the added moods, care has been taken not to 
introduce any sentences but those of the simplest 
kind, and in respect to which no doubt could 
exist as to the proper form to be used. Such 
brief remarks on the syntax as appeared needful 
have in all cases been given, either as parts of the 
rules, or in notes on the exercises. An index of 



PREFACE. Xlll 



these remarks will be found at the end of the 
work. This book now contains, in systematic 
order, a complete set of exercises on every part of 
the Greek verb ; and it is the only book in the 
language which does so. 

The term " optative '' has been retained solely 
in deference to established usage, all our gram- 
mars making use of it, so that to omit it might 
cause considerable difficulty to those who may 
wish to use a grammar in conjunction with the 
exercise-book. There can be no doubt, however, 
that the more correct and simple method is to 
class the tenses of the subjunctive and optative 
together under the former name ; the form of the 
optative tenses and their syntax prove clearly 
that they are nothing but the past tenses of the 
subjunctive. 

In another matter of nomenclature, however, the 
present edition differs from ordinary practice, and 
from the former edition : the names of the tenses 
have been made descriptive of their real meaning : 
thus, instead of " pluperfect " the tense is called 
"past perfect," instead of "imperfect" the term 
" past imperfect " is used. It is believed that 
the classification into imperfect, perfect, and in- 
definite, will be found much more distinct and 
natural than that in common use ; which in some 



XIV PREFACE. 

respects is positively erroneous : thus, .what are 
called the present infinitive and present participle, 
are frequently past in signification; or, at least, are 
to be translated by past forms in English : their 
proper designation is *' imperfect." 

Another improvement is the more systematic 
and complete explanation of many things which 
were either only partially explained in the first 
edition, or in a desultory, detached manner : for 
instance, the rules relating to the augment and 
reduplication and to the euphonic changes, are 
now given complete in their proper places, and 
are not scattered in various parts of the book, nor 
appended to particular words, which was one of 
the greatest defects of the previous edition. 

Without departing too far from the principle of 
constant repetition, a much greater variety of 
words has been introduced into the exercises ; so 
that there are fully twice as many Greek words in 
this as there were in the first edition. Most of 
the exercises also, especially in the former part of 
the book, have been considerably shortened. 

An appendix has been added, containing 
some irregular nouns, a synopsis of the Greek 
verb, and rules for the conjugation of verbs in /xt. 
The synopsis should be frequently referred to in 
the course of using the book for the purpose of 



PREFACE. XV 

enabling the pupil to gain a general notion of the 
inflexions ; which he can hardly be expected to do 
from the study of the separate rules. 

The remarks on the alphabet, explaining the 
classification of the letters and the principles 
which regulate their combinations, will be found 
of considerable advantage to those who use the 
book, and should be carefully studied. 

The rules have throughout been corrected, and 
in many cases wholly re-written : for instance, 
those on the dual number of verbs. 

Lastly, the vocabularies, instead of being given 
under each exercise, are now placed all together at 
the end, in the alphabetical order of the English 
words. Several reasons may be given in favour 
of this change : first, a great saving of space is 
thus effected ; secondly, the words may be more 
readily found ; and lastly, the various derivatives 
from the same root are frequently brought toge- 
ther, and their connection shewn. The quantity 
of the doubtful syllables in the Greek has been 
marked in the vocabulary. 

The Editor may be permitted to say that in 
introducing these changes, he has done so with 
the approval of Professor Maiden ; to whom he is 
under deep obligations for his unwearied kindness 
in revising the sheets ; every one of which owes 



XVI PREFACE. 

much to the numerous suggestions and emenda- 
tions made by that gentleman : in fact, there is 
scarcely a page in the book that has not been 
improved by his observations. The Editor must 
also express his thanks to Professor Key for 
several valuable suggestions. 

The following remarks on the mode of using the 
book are necessary : 

The scholar is supposed to be acquainted v^ith 
the meaning of the terms of grammar used in 
Latin and English, so that no explanation of them 
is given in the book. 

Before the scholar proceeds to translate any 
given exercise, he should learn by heart the rules 
and examples, and the Crude Forms of all the 
words required in it ; and for this purpose it will 
be found a useful plan to direct him to write out 
the English words, and opposite to them the 
Greek Crude Forms given in the vocabulary ; 
paying particular attention to the remarks pre- 
fixed to the vocabulary on the proper mode of 
using it. He should afterwards be examined, viva 
voce, upon all that is required for the translation 
of the exercise ; and then proceed to use his know- 
ledge accordingly ; first translating into Greek, 
viva voce, and afterwards on paper. It will also 
be advisable to require him to commit to memory 



PREFACE. XVll 

given portions of the vocabulary, commencing at 
the beginning, and going regularly through it, 
frequently returning to what has been previously 
learned. 

This book may be used by itself, and contains 
all that is necessary to enable the pupil to trans- 
late the exercises, without the aid of either 
grammar or lexicon. Great pains have been 
taken to make the vocabulary complete, and it is 
hoped that few, if any omissions, will be found. 



University College, 
Octoher, 1844. 



XIX 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

Preface . . . . . , . . . . ... v 

Alphabet , . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii 

Remarks on the Alphabet . . . . . . . . . . xxiv 

EXERCISES. 

I. Present Tense of ftr ' be,' First and Second Personal 

Pronouns, and Nominative of Masculine and 

Feminine Nouns in o . , . . . . . . 1 

II. Nominative of the Masculine Article and Adjective .. 3 

III. Nominative of Neuter Nouns in o, and of the Neuter 

Article . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 

IV. Past Imperfect of ttr . . 5 

V. Nominative of Masculine Nouns in a . . . . 6 

VI. Nominative of Feminine Nouns in a, and of the Femi- 

nine Article . . . . . . . . . . 7 

VII. Future of fff 9 

VIII. Dative of Nouns in o, and of the Masculine and Neuter 

Article 10 

IX. Dative of Nouns in a, and of the Feminine Article . . 12 

X. Genitive of Nouns in o, and of the Masculine and Neuter 

Article . , . . . , . . 14 

XI. Genitive of Masculine Nouns in a . . . . 1 G 

XII. Genitive of Feminine Nouns in a, and of the Feminine 

Article . . . . . . . . , . 17 

General Remarks on the Verb , . . . . . 19 



XX 



CONTENTS. 



ACTIVE VOICE, 



TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 



XIII. Present Tense, Accusative of Nouns in o, and of the 

Masculine and Neuter Article . . . . . . 20 

XIV. Present of Verbs increased or strengthened .. 24 

XV. Future Tense, Accusative of Nouns in a, and of the 

Feminine Article, Vocative of Nouns in o and a 28 

Connected View of the Inflexions of Nouns in a and o 32 

XVI. Past Imperfect Tense ; the Augment ; Comparative 

and Superlative of Adjectives . . . . . . 35 

XVII. Second Aorist ; Consonant or Separable Declension 40 

XVIII. First Aorist 47 

XIX. Present Perfect ; Reduplication; NeuterNounsof the 

Consonant Declension . . . . . . . . 51 

XX. Past Perfect : Nouns in ev{eY) 56 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS . . 59 

XXI. Tenses of the Subjunctive .. .. .. ib. 

XXII. Tenses of the Optative 64 

XXIII. Tenses of the Imperative . . . . . . 70 

XXIV. Infinitives 73 

XXV. Participles 80 



PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. 

General Remarks 



88 



TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE, 

XXVI. Present 90 

XXVII. Future Imperfect 92 

XXVIII. Futures Indefinite Passive 94 

XXIX. Past Imperfect 97 

XXX. Passive Aorists 100 

XXXI. First Aorist Middle 103 

XXXII. Second Aorist Middle 105 

XXXTII. Present Perfect Passive and Middle ; the Com- 
parative in toi^, and superlative in loro .. 106 



CONTENTS. 



XXI 



XXXIV. Past Perfect, Passive and Middle 

XXXV, Future Perfect, Passive and Middle 



PAGE 
112 

115 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS, 

XXXVI. Tenses of the Subjunctive 117 

XXXVII. Tenses of the Optative 122 

XXXVIII. Tenses of the Imperative 130 

XXXIX. Infinitives 135 

XL. Participles 143 

XLI. The Dual Number of Nouns, Adjectives, and Partici- 
ples, and of the Active Verb , . . . . . 152 

XLII. The Dual Number of the Passive and Middle Verb 157 



APPENDIX. 

I. Some Irregular Nouns and Adjectives declined .. .. 161 

II. Sjmopsis of the Rules of Formation of the Greek Verb 162 

III. Verbs in fii 168 

IV. Regular Tenses of the Verbs in /xi 171 
Vocabulary .. .. .. .. .. ..173 

Index of the Rules of Syntax , . 195 



G 2 



XX 111 



THE GREEK ALPHABET. 









English 


Numerical 


Large. 


Small. 


Names. 


Equivalents. 


Values. 


A 


a 


Alpha 


a 


1 


B 


^ 


Beta 


b 


2 


r 


7 


Gamma 


s 


3 


A 


S 


Delta 


d 


4 


E 


s 


E-psilon 


e 


5 


F 


T 


Digamma 


f, or V, or w* 6 


z 


K 


Zeta 


z 


7 


H 


n 


Eta 


e 


8 


e 


9 


Theta 


th 


9 


I 


I 


Iota 


i 


10 


K 


K 


Kappa 


k, or hard 


c 20 


A 


\ 


Lambda 


1 


30 


M 


H' 


Mu 


m 


40 


N 


V 


Nu 


n 


50 


S 


I 


Xi 


X 


60 








0-micron 


5 


70 


n 


TT 


Pi 


P 


80 


Q 


9 


Koppa 


q* 


90 


p 


p 


Rho 


r 


100 


s 


(T 


Sigma 


s 


200 


T 


T 


Tau 


t 


300 


Y 


V 


U-psilon 


u 


400 


$ 


1> 


Phi 


ph, or f 


500 


X 


X 


Chi 


ch hard 


600 


* 


^ 


Psi 


ps 


700 


Q 


a» 


0-mega 


o 


800 



* These two letters were used by the most ancient Greeks, but 
ceased to be written at an early period of the language. They are 



XXIV REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. 

Although the Alphabet does not contain any 
character representing the sound of our h, the 
Greeks had that sound, and denoted it at the 
beginning of words commencing with vowels by 
the sign ( ' ). In other cases it combines with 
the consonants, giving rise to the letters Q, 0, 
and X- 

Remark 1. The consonants are divided into 
the following classes, to which frequent reference 
will have to be made in the course of the follow- 
ing exercises. The horizontal arrangement is 
according to the part of the organ of voice chiefly 
concerned in the production of the sounds, the 
vertical according to the quality of the sounds. 

MUTES. 

Thin Medial Aspirated 

(Tenues). (Mediae). (Aspiratae). 

Labials tt /3 ^ 

Dentals r ^ 

Gutturals '^ 7 X 

LIQUIDS, OR SEMI-VOWELS. 
X, fx,v,p; 
fjL, labial 
V, dental 



> sometimes called nasals. 



inserted here because they continued to be used as numerical sym- 
bols, and because one of them at least, the digamma, is of great 
importance in the explanation of many forms of inflexion and 
other phenomena in the language. The digamma is also called 
vau or bau. 



REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. XXV 

X and p are sometimes called semi-vowels, to 
the exclusion of /u and v. 

THE SIBILA.NT. 

The only letter belonging to this class is a. 
On account of the Uttle affinity between the 
sound of which this is the representative, and 
the other consonant sounds, many changes take 
place in the form of words when o- comes imme- 
diately after other consonants, o- is most nearly 
connected with the semi-vowels, among which, 
indeed, it is sometimes included. 

DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 

^ = (tS, 5 = ya, K(T or ^tr. \p = ttct, j3o- or ^o-. 

The following are the principal rules which 
regulate the combination of consonants. 

1. Mutes of different classes (horizontal) can- 
not stand together, except when the second mute 
is a dental. 

2. When Mutes of different classes come to- 
gether (the second being a dental), they must be 
of the same quality ; that is, thin must be joined 
to thin, medial to medial, aspirated to aspirated. 
To effect this, the first mute generally conforms 
to the second ; being changed for another mute of 
the same class as itself, but of the same quality 
as the second mute. The aspirates can never be 
doubled; and the doubling of the medials takes 



XXVI REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. 

place only in particular contractions and old for- 
mations, such as Ka(5j3aXe, sdSeKTE. 

3. With the labials and gutturals or combines to 
form \p and 5 ; before o- the dentals are omitted. 

4. In verbal formations, before fx all the labials 
become ju, the gutturals become 7, the dentals 
become cr. 

5. Before labials v becomes fx ; before gut- 
turals, y in the written language, but retains its 
proper sound ; before the liquids it is assimilated 
to them ; before cr it is dropped. 

Remark 2. The only consonants that can 
stand at the end of a word are cr, v, pj and k ; the 
last occurs at the end of two words only, €k and 
ovKj which should always be read as part of the 
word following. Since ^ and -tp are double con- 
sonants, the final sound of which is that of <r, 
they may, of course, stand at the end of words. 

Remark 3. The sigma at the end of a word 
is written in the form g : at the beginning or in 
the middle of a word, a : so (Turrfiog, 

Remark 4. y is the representative of two 
distinct sounds, g and the guttural n. Before y, 
Kj X and 5, n takes the form 7. So ayy^Xog, 
cFvyKoir-n, Ayxi<^VQ> \apvy^, pronounced angelos, 
sunkope, Anchises, larunx. 

Remark 5. When used as numerals, the let- 
ters have an accent above them, thus, a. The 
numbers between the tens (e. g. 15, 59) are de- 
noted by the sign of the tens followed by that of 



REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. XXVll 

the units : thus 15 is tg, 59 is vO\ In the same 
way are expressed the numbers between the hun- 
dreds : thus, 478 is vor}\ The symbol for 900 
was 11) (sampi). 1,000 was denoted by a, 2,000 by 
^|3, and so on. This system of numeration, how- 
ever, is comparatively modern, and was not em- 
ployed by the classical Greek writers, who always 
express the numerals at length. 

Read. 

AvXig, oivog. Ao\o\p. ^pvysg. H^w. Xapvy^. 
A.y\La7]Q. Ar^fiOdOevrig. QovKvdidr}g. ^Hpo^orog. 
So^okXtjc. Xapirsg. Biag, SoXwv. KvjOO^. Kpoi- 
aog. KoXog. icir\vpog. rpij^w. iH^ep^rig. riyEjuiovLa. 
avdpeg. '"^dojp. 'PoSo^. poda. ^aXafiig. Mapa- 
6wv. 

Write in Greek. 

Olumpos. Homeros. Rhegion. Ilion. Sku- 
thia. Naxos. Lakedaimon. Xanthippe. Titan. 
Xanthos. Perikles. Lusias. Minos. Platon. 
Aristophanes. Aischulos. Xenophon. Aischi- 
nes. Euripides. Aineias. Strabon. Zeuxis. 
Okeanos. Galatia. 



GREEK EXEECISES. 



I. — Present of ES "Be," First and Second 
Personal Pronouns, and Nominative of 
Masculine and Feminine Nouns in O. 

Remark 1. The Crude Form of the verb to he 
in Greek is tg. The inflections of this verb are 
remarkable in Greek, as in many other languages, 
for their departure from the usual rules of inflection. 

to 

H-juLL I am. £cr-jU£v we are. 

£t-Q or EL thou art. ea-rs ye are. 

£o--rt(v) he is. £l-<ti(v) they are. 

£ig is the old form of the 2nd sing.; in the 
Attic writers sl is used. 

The V is added to cart and eiai when they 
come before a vowel. 

Remark 2. The personal pronouns also are 
very irregular in their inflections, for which rea- 
son the first and second are here given complete. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Norn 


. eyio I. 


r)fiug we. 


(TV thou. 


vfieig ye. 


Gen. 


ffiov or [lov of me. 


rjfiwv of us. 


(Tov of thee. 


vfiiov of you. 


Dat. 


efioiOTfioi tome. 


rjfiiv to us. 


(Toi to thee. 


vfi'iv to you. 


Ace. 


f/*£ or fie me. 


Tifidg us. 
B 


ae thee. 


vndg you. 



-6 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Remark 3. Nouns in o masc. and fern, are 
made nom. in the sing, by c, and in the plur. by 
I, added to the Crude Form. 

Ewamples. 

Masc. C.F. aSeXipo brother. N.S. adsXcpog. N.P. adeX^oi. 
Fern. vT](ro island. vr](Tog. vrjffoi. 



I^ am a man. Thou art a man. He is a man. 
We are friends. Ye are friends. They are friends. 
I am an Athenian. We are Athenians. Ye 
are Athenians. I am a Lacedaemonian. Ye are 
men. He is a barbarian. We are barbarians. 
Ye are barbarians. He is a friend. Thou art an 
ally. We are allies. He is an enemy to thee. 
I am an Athenian and aYi ally. We are Athe- 
nians and allies. They are Lacedaemonians and 
enemies. He is a friend to us. They are friends 
to you. Ye are friends to me. They are Corin- 
thians and enemies. Theref is a road. There 
are seven roads. Naxos is an island. Paros 



* The distinction of person being sufficiently made by the ter- 
minations of the verb, the nominative cases of the pronouns are 
not used except when they are emphatic. 

When the verb eg serves merely to connect the subject and pre- 
dicate, as in most of the above sentences, it must be placed after 
the predicate, that is, in these sentences, last : but when eg is used 
as the substantive verb, being both copula and predicate, as in the 
sentence, " There is a road," it should be placed ^rs^. 

t In these and the following sentences, "There" and "It" 
are not to be expressed in Greek. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



and Delos are islands. There are seven beech- 
trees. There is a beech-tree. It* is a disease. 
There are diseases. They are virgins. 



II. — Nominative of the Masculine Article 
AND Adjective. 

Remark 1. The Greek language has only one 
article, which answers in meaning, and generally 
in use, to the English definite article, " the." 

Remark 2. The Crude Form of the masc. ar- 
ticle is TO, To is declined like aSeX^o and all 
nouns of that class, except in the nom. In the 
nom. the r is softened into an aspirate. In the 
sing. nom. the case-ending is not added : in the 
plur. it is. Hence we have 6, not rog, in the 
sing., and ot, not tol, in the plur. 
Example. 
N.S. 6 a^fX^oc the brother. N. P. ol a^cX^oi the brothers. 

Adjectives in o are inflected like nouns. 

C. F. ayaOo brave. 
N. S. ayaOog aSeXfog. N. P. ayaOoi ade\<poi. 



The Athenian is a friend to us. The Athenians 
are friends to me. The general is a friend to 
you. The Corinthians are enemies to thee. The 
brother is a friend to us. The generals are brave. 
The brother is brave. The generals are ready. 

* See Note f on p. 2, 



4 GREEK EXERCISES. 

The allies are ready. We are ready. Ye are 
brave. The brother is fearful. The generals and 
captains are safe. The barbarians are ready. 
The messengers are ready. The messenger is 
faithful to us. The slave is faithful to you. The 
brothers are friends to me. Thou art faithful to 
me. We are faithful to thee. The captain is 
brave. The captains are safe. 



III. — Nominative of Neuter Nouns in O, and 
OF the Neuter Article. 

Remark 1. The nom. and ace. of all neuter 
words are the same in form. 

Remark 2. The nom. and ace. plur. of neuter 
words always end in a, but the a sometimes 
unites with another vowel to form rj. 

Remark 3. Neuter nouns in o are made 
nom., in the sing, by v, and in the plur. by a, 
added to the Crude Form. In the plur. the o is 
dropped : po^-a, not podo-a. 
Example. 
Neut. C. F. podo* a rose. N. S. poSov. N. P. poSa, 

Remark 4. The Crude Form of the neuter 
article is to. In the sing. nom. no case-ending 
is added. It is made plur. in the same way as 
the noun, by adding a to the Crude Form, and 
dropping the o. Hence we have not ToUf but ra. 

* p at the beginning of a word is always aspirated. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



N. S. TO podov the rose. N. P. tu poSa the roses. 

The adjective is inflected like the noun. 

C. F. KoXo beautiful. N. S. KaXov podov. N. P. KoXa poca. 



The rose is beautiful. The place is fortified. 
The roses are beautiful.* The places are forti- 
fied. The arms are ready. The eminence is 
fortified. The prizes are ready. The bows are 
ready. The bow is near. The sacrifices are 
favourable. The gifts are beautiful. The supper 
is ready. The beautiful children are ready. The 
dinner is ready. The animals are ready. The 
leaves are beautiful. 



IV. — Past Imperfect of ES. 
Remark. Read Rem. 1, under Exerc. I. 
irv I was. fi-jLLEv we were. 

^-GOaf or ^g thou wast. rj-Te ye were, 

^-v he was. ri-aav they were. 



I was a friend to thee. Thou wast a slave to 
me. The general was a friend to us. We were 
enemies to thee. Ye were enemies to us. The 

* la Greek, plural neuter nominatives may be, and generally 
are, joined to verbs in the singular, unless the notion of plurality 
is to be made prominent, or the nominative is the name of a 
person or living creature, in which cases the plural verb is often 
used. 

t ijcfQu is used in the earlier and better writers. 
B 2 



b GREEK EXERCISES. 

messengers were faithful to us. We were ready. 
The place was lofty. The eminence was fortified. 
The apples were large. The garments were 
beautiful. We were brave. The Corinthians 
were cowardly. The messengers were cowardly. 
The allies were fearful. Thou wast brave. Ye 
were well-girt. The messenger was eager. The 
animals were beautiful. The children were 
ready. 



V. — Nominative of Masculine Nouns in A. 

Remark 1. Nouns in a masc. are made nom. 
in the same way as nouns in o masc, by g in the 
sing, and i in the plur. added to the Crude Form. 

Remark 2. When the final a is preceded by 
£, I, or p, the above is the only rule to be at- 
tended to ; but if any other letter than one of 
these precedes the a, the a is changed into ri in 
all the cases of the singular, except the genitive 
and, in some instances, the vocative. 

In the plural the a is never changed. 

Any deviation to be made from these rules will 
be specially noted. 

Examples. 

Masc. C.F. vedvia young man. N.S. veaviag. N.P. veaviai. 
TToXiTa citizen. ttoXittiq. TroXtrat. 

With the article. 

N.S. 6 veaviag. N.P. oi veaviai. 
6 iroXiTrjQ. oi TroXirat. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 7 

I was a youth. Thou wast not a youth. We are 
citizens. Ye were citizens. They were stewards. 
I am a tax-gatherer. Cyrus was a satrap. We 
were satraps. The traitors are cowardly. The 
judge is brave. The youth was faithless. The 
sailors are faithful. The islander was brave. 
The heavy-armed men were supperless. The 
soldiers and citizens were warlike. The captains 
were safe. The citizen was well-girt. The 
slinger was ready. The slingers are ready. 
There were ten thousand bowmen. The bowman 
was fearful. The shield-bearer is ready. ^Eneas 
was faithful. The tax-gatherers were eager. 
The stewards are near. Pythagoras was a philo- 
sopher. The steward is a friend to me and to 
thee. 



VI. — Nominative of Feminine Nouns in A, 

AND OF THE FeMININE ArTICLE. 

Remark 1. Nouns in a fem. are made nom. 
in the plur. in the same way as masc. nouns in a 
and o, by i added to the Crude Form. In the 
sing, the case-ending g is not added. 

In addition to this, the following general rules 
are to be observed. 

1. Nouns in a preceded (1) by the vowel c or i, 
or (2) by the semivowel p, retain the a of the 
Crude Form all through the singular. See 
ExERC. V. Rem. 2. 



O GREEK EXERCISES. 

2. In nouns in a preceded by XX, vv, o-c, ttj ?, 
i(jy or ?, or by a after a diphthong or long vowel, 
the a of the Crude Form passes into rj in the gen. 
and dat. sing, only.* In the nom. sing, of these 
nouns the a is short. 

3. In other nouns in a fem. the a passes into r\ 
all through the singular. 

4. In the plur. all these classes agree, the a 
always remaining unchanged. 

Any deviation to be made from these rules will 
be specially noted. 

Examples. 

Fem. C.F. Ovpa door. N.S. Qvpd. N.P. 9vpai. 

Tpaire^a table. rpairei^d. Tpa-m^ai. 

Kojfia village. Kwfiri. KU)fiai. 

Remark 2. The Crude Form of the fem. ar- 
ticle is ra. The same rule applies in the fem. as 
in the masc. to the r. The r is softened into 
an aspirate; and the case -ending is not added in 
the sing. 

Ta is inflected with -q in the sing, according to 
Rem. 1, Rule 3. Hence we have in the plur. 
at, but in the sing. 17. 

Examples. 
N. S. Tj Qvpa the door. N. P. at Qvpai the doors. 
ij rpaTTC^a the table. at TpainZ^ai the tables. 

ri Kojfiri the village. al Kiofiai the villages. 



* This rule applies to some nouns not comprised in any of the 
above classes, but they need not be specified here, especially as 
they cannot be included under any general rule. 



GREEK EXERCISES. if 

Remark 3. Adjectives are inflected in the 
fem. according to Rules 1 and 3, in Rem. 1. 
Rule 2 applies only to substantives.* 

Examples. 

C.F. KaXo. N. S. KaX og, ri, ov. N. P. koX oi, at, a. 

diTTO. diTT og, r], ov. Sitt ot, at, a. 

KTxvpo. to'xyp og, a, ov. i-<^X^P ^*> ^*> "• 

The door is strong. There are seven doors. 
The goddess is beautiful. The knife was long 
and strong. The table is beautiful. The cherry- 
tree is lofty. The village vv^as not large. The bride 
was beautiful. The garrison was strong. There 
were seven couches. The doors were strong. 
The knives were beautiful. The villages were 
large. The village is fortified. The shields were 
gifts. The letter was sacred. It is evening. The 
island was small. The road is not narrow. The 
assembly is large. The diseases were violent. 
The precious stone is large. The entrance is 
narrow. The house was wooden. The bridges 
were wooden. There was another conflict. 
There are two (say, double) roads. 



VII. — Future of ES. 
Remark. Read Rem. 1, under Exerc. I. 



* This last remark is confined to adjectives, the Crude Forms of 
which in the masc. and neut. end in o. 



10 GREEK EXERCISES. 

ia-o^uL I shall be. ea-oji^da We shall be. 

^a-rf or £o-ft thou wilt be. ecr-eaOe ye will be. 

£CF'{s)Tat he will be. ia-ovrai they will be. 



I shall be a brave soldier. Thou wilt be brave. 
He will be cowardly. We shall be well-girt. Ye 
will be eager. They will be supperless. The 
messenger will be a friend to us. The Athenians 
will not be eager allies. The citizens will be brave 
sailors. The disease will be violent. The island- 
ers will be safe. The road will be narrow. The 
slaves will be ready. The generals and soldiers 
will be bold. Thou wilt not be faithless to me. 
We shall be fond of war. The place will be sacred. 
The eminences will be fortified. The rose will 
be beautiful. The sacrifices will be favourable. 
The bows will be strong. The stewards will be 
cowardly. I shall be a warlike satrap. Ye will 
be tax-gatherers. The bride will be beautiful. 
The doors will be lofty. The knives will be 
long. The entrance will be narrow. 



VIII. — Dative of Nouns in O, and of the 

Masculine and Neuter Article. 

Remark. Nouns in o are made dat. by t in 
the sing., and ig in the plur., added to the Crude 
Form. In the sing, the o is lengthened, becom- 



GREEK EXERCISES. II 

ing w, and the i is written under the w, not after 
it. An I so placed is called iota subscript. 

The dative of the masc. and neuter article, and 
of adjectives in o, is made in the same way. 

Masc. C.F. aM^o. D.S. a^f\0<fj. D.V. ah\(poig. 
Fern. vr}(To. vt](T(^. vrjcFoig. 

Neut. podo. podci). podoig. 

With the Article. 
Masc. D. S. r^ aSe\(p<{). D.P. toiq adeXtpoig. 

Neut. T({j pod(i). ToiQ podoiQ. 



The general will be in the tower. I shall be 
in the field. Thou art in the boat. We shall be 
in the boats. The Athenians were in the plain. 
Ye will be in the garden. Cyrus is in the camp. 
The Lacedaemonians will be with the strangers. 
The satraps will be in the towers. I am with Cyrus 
in the camp. Thou wast not in the crowd. The 
boat will be in the river. The slinger will be 
with the general in the expedition. The brother 
was with the messenger in the crowd. The sis- 
ters will be with the brothers on the eminences. 
The friends were with me under the tree. The 
corn is not in the garden. The boats and horses 
are in the river. Th^ soldiers are in the boats. 
Cyrus was brave in the war. Those* with Clear- 



* Use the nom. plur. masc. of the article : the (persons) with 
Clearchus. 



12 GREEK EXERCISES. 

chus were bold. The heavy-armed men are not in 
the crowd. The (precious) stones are in the 
palace. The beech -tree was in the park. The 
lofty beech-trees are in the great park. The 
beautiful virgins are with the farmers. The narrow 
road is in (the) island. The fearful virgins were 
in (the) sacred islands. The arms are in (the) 
ditch. The bold messengers will be faithless to 
thee and me. The warlike islanders were faithful 
to us in the war. 



IX. — Dative op Nouns in A, and of the 
Feminine Article. 

Remark. Nouns in a masc. and fem. are 
made dat. in the same way as nouns in o, in the 
sing, by i, and in the plur. by ig^ added to the 
Crude Form. 

In the sing, the t is subscript. 

Read the Remarks in Exerc. V. and Exerc. 
VI. again. 

Ea^amples. 

Masc. C, F. veavia. D. S. vf,aviq,. D. P. vsaviaiQ. 
TToXiTa. iroXiry. TroXiTaig. 

With the Article. 

D. S. ry veavig.. D. P. toiq vtaviaig. 
Ttfi TToXiry. TOIQ TToXiTaig. 



I 



GREEK EXERCISES. 13 

Fern. C.F. Ovpa. B.S. 9vp(^. B.V. Ovpaig. 

rpaTTtZa. rpuTre'Cy. rpaTrs^aig. 

KWfxa. K(jj[xy. KWfiaig. 

With the Article. 
D. S. ry Qvpq,. D. P. raiq Ovpaig. 

ry rpa-KiZ^y. raiQ Tpairt^aig. 

Ty Kijjfiy. Taig KiOjiaig. 



1.* The general is with the youth. The youth 
will be with the steward. The stewards were 
with the youths. The judge was with Pythagoras. 
Pythagoras is not with the sailors in the house. 
The bowman was with the shield-bearer in the 
camp. The philosopher was with the citizen in 
the park. Cyrus is a friend to the youth. Thou 
wilt be friendly to the steward. 

2. The rower was in the boat with the sailor. 
Thou art an enemy to the Persian. I am friendly 
to the soldier. We were not faithful to the satrap. 
Cyrus was with the sailor and the traitor in the 
boat. The general was with the bowman in the 
camp. 

3. Ten thousand camels are in the country. 
The philosopher is in the porch. The just judges 
are with the philosophers in the porches. The dis- 
ciples were in the market-place. The soldiers 



* The divisions in this exercise correspond to the various 
classes of Crude Forms in a. 1 and 2 contain examples of mas- 
culine nouns ; 3, 4, and 5, of feminine nouns. 
C 



14 GREEK EXERCISES. 

were not present on the day. The barbarian will 
be in the porch. There will be a noise in the as- 
sembly. 

4. The emerald and the sapphire are in the 
sea. The disciple was in the conflict. The 
snails were with the bees in the house. The bee 
is on the tongue. The bees were on the thorn. 
The snails are with the bees on the thorns. 

5. The general is in the tent. The Athenians 
are in the village. Ten thousand soldiers are 
in the battle. A thousand soldiers were in the 
garrison. The heavy-armed men were with the 
bowmen in the flight. The unjust steward was 
with the bride in the park. The youths were 
not present with the brides in the conflict. 



(I 



X. — Genitive or Nouns in O, and of the 
Masculine and Neuter Article. 

Remark 1. The genitive plural of all words 
in Greek ends in wv. 

Remark 2. The genitive singular of nouns in 
o is made by adding o, and the plur. by adding 
wv, to the Crude Form. 

In the singular oo is contracted into ou, and 
in the plural the o of the Crude Form is dropped. 
Hence we have not avOpojiroo, but avOpwirov, 
— not av6pio7ro(jt)v, but avOpwirojv. 



i 



GREEK EXERCISES. 15 

The genitive of the masc. and neut. article and 
adjective is made in the same v^^ay. 

Example. 

Masc. C. F. avOpbJTTo. G. S. avOpioirov. G. P. avOpMirmp. 
Fern. vt](TO. vrjaov. vriaittv, 

Neut. po^o. poSov. po^iov. 

With the Article. 
Masc. G. S. Tov av9p(jJ7rov. G. P. tojv avQpcjTroJv. 
Neut. TOV podov. riov poditjv. 



The rest of the messengers* will be in the 
middle of the camp of Cyrus. The house was 
full of corn. The wild beasts were in the middle 
of the river. The village is full of corn. The 
chariots are full of wine. The slaves of the mes- 
sengers are enemies to one another (plur.). The 
rest of the warlike Corinthians were in the plain of 
Castolus. The rest of the enemies' boats will be in 
the sea. The boats are in the middle of the river. 
The wise generals are outside the camp. The is- 
landers were within the tower. The arms are 
within the beautiful house. The bows are outside 
the large park. The children were not in the camp 
of the Athenians. The precious stones are not in 
the house of the ally. The son of the faithless 



* ** The rest of the messengers" is equivalent to *' the other 
messengers," so that in this and the following sentences, *' rest 
of" is to be translated by the adjective aXXo ; and the noun 
coming after " rest of" will be in the nominative, not the geni- 
tive. 



16 GREEK EXERCISES. 

barbarian will be in the plain. The animals will 
not be in the field. The sacrifices are favourable 
to the expedition of the Athenians. The victims 
will not be favourable to the army of the fearful 
Lacedaemonians. The dreadful wild beasts are in 
the islands. 



XI. — Genitive of Masculine Nouns in A. 

Remark. The genitive of masc. nouns in a is 
made in the same way as that of nouns in o, in 
the sing, by o, and in the plur. by wv, added to 
the Crude Form. 

In the singular the ao becomes fo, which is 
contracted into ov, and in the plural awv be- 
comes £wv, which is contracted into wv. Hence 
we have not veaviao, but veaviov ; not veaviawv, 

but vtaviijjv. 

Example. 

Masc. C.F. veavia. G.S. viaviov. G. P. vtavi(i)V. 

TToXlTa. TToXlTOV. TToKlTlilV. 

With the Article. 
G. S. Tov veaviov. G. P. ru)v veavKov. 

TOV iroXtTOV. T(j)V TToXlTOJV. 



The son of the citizen will be in the park. The 
enemy of the steward will be in the assembly. 
The sons of the tax-gatherer were in the market- 
place. The valuable garment of the traitor is in the 
tent. The roses and the girdles of the rowers were 



GREEfK EXERCISES. 17 

in the porch. iEneas was the son of Anchises. 
The disciples of Pythagoras are in the house of 
the master of the slave. The shields and letters 
were on the table of the Persian. The long 
knives were in the boat of the judge. The beau- 
tiful roses will be in the chariots of the Persians. 
The narrow road is through the garden of the citi- 
zen. The wonderful fountain was in the garden of 
the steward. The letters of the soldier and of the 
bowmen are not in the house of the captain. The 
bride was not in the country of the youth. The 
girdle of the satrap is not in the tent. The arms 
of the traitors will be in the village. Ten thou- 
sand of the heavy-armed are in the plain. The 
judges are in the assembly of the citizens. 



XII. — Genitive of Feminine Nouns in A, 
AND OF the Feminine Article. 

Remark. The genitive of nouns in a is made in 
the sing, bye, intheplur. by wv, added to the Crude 
Form. In the plur. the a of the Crude Form 
becomes £, and £wv is contracted into wv. Hence 
we have not Ovpatov but Ovpojv. 

The genitive of the fem. art. is made in the same 
way. 

Refer to the Rem. and rules in Exerc. V. as 
to the change of a into ri. 
c 2 



18 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Example. 
Fem. C.F. Qvpa. G.S. Qvpaq. G.P. Qvptav. 

KlOfia. KU)flJ]Q. KCJflOJV. 

BaXarra. OaXaTTijg. OaXaTTcjv. 

With the Article. 
G.S. TTjg Ovpag. G.P. tojv Ovpiov. 

TTJQ KUJflTjg. T(t)V K0}}10}V. 

rrjg QaXarrrig. tmv OaXaTTiov. 



I shall be in the middle of the market-place : 
thou wilt be outside of the porch.* The road is 
through the porches. Are the enemies outside 
the country ? We are within the market-place, 
ye are outside.* The virgins were within the 
porch. The roses were in the close chariot of the 
Cilician woman. The arms are not in the chariot 
of the goddess. The messengers will be in the 
tent of the cruel queen. The rest of the bees are in 
the garden of the bride. The sister is outside the 
village. Ye are in the middle of the sea. The 
citizens are with the philosopher near the foun- 
tains. The traitors and the youths were near the 
beech-trees. The swift boat is near the island. 
Thou wast near the thorns. Are the carriages near 
the road ? The gardens of the judges were small. 
The soldiers were not bold in the beginning of the 
battle. The others are bold in the beginning of 
the conflict. 

* In these sentences the pronouns must be expressed, in order 
to mark the contrast between "I" and "thou," "we" and 
" you," which are here emphatic. 



greek exercises. 19 

General Remarks on the Verb. 

The inflexions of the Greek verb are divided 
into many classes, having reference partly to their 
forms and partly to their significations : 

1st. Into active, reflective or middle, and pas- 
sive : 

2nd. Into the indicative, subjunctive, optative, 
imperative, and infinitive moods ; and as the 
subjunctive and optative really constitute only a 
single mood, this division agrees exactly v^^ith the 
corresponding arrangement of the Latin verb : 
In both languages (indeed in all languages) the 
infinitive is not properly a mood, but a neuter 
noun undeclined : 

3rd. Into the various tenses, of which the only 
ones pecuUar to Greek, as compared with Latin, 
are the aorists, the signification of which will 
be explained in the proper place. 



ACTIVE VOICE. 

Tenses of the Indicative. 

The forms of the indicative are used in sen- 
tences which state any thing positively ; hence 
they are found in all independent sentences, 
whether affirmative or interrogative. 



20 GREEK EXERCISES. 

XIII. — Present Tense, Accusative of Nouns 

IN O, AND OF THE MaSCULINE AND NeUTER 

Article. 

Remark 1. The present tense is formed by 
the following terminations added to the Crude 
Form. 



w 


1. ofiev. 


ac 


2. £r£. 


£t 


3. ovai. 




Example. 


C. F. Xv loosen. 


Xv-u) I loosen, or am 


I loosening. Xv-o/isv we loosen. 


Xv-ei£ thou loosenest, 


&c. Xv-tTE ye loosen. 


Xv-ei he loosens. 


Xv-ov(n they loosen. 



Remark 2. In verbs which end in a, a, or o, 
the vowel of the Crude Form combines with the 
initial vowel or diphthong of the terminations, 
whence such verbs are called contract verbs. The 
contractions (which take place only in the pre- 
sent and past imperfect tenses) are made accord- 
ing to the following rules, which are of universal 
application.* 

1. w absorbs all the short vowels; hence aw, 
£ci>, 6(1), all become w. 



* Only so many of the rules of contraction are here given as 
are required in the pres. and past imperf. indie, tenses of the 
verb. 



A 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



21 






2. a absorbs all vowels following it except o 
and (o. Hence — 

a-eig becomes uq. 

„ are. 

3. £ coalesces into the diphthong u (or the long 
vowel rj) with all vowels following it except o and 
to. Hence — 

i-£ig becomes eig. 

i-STE „ £tr£. 

4. o and ov coalesce with all vowels preceding 
or following, making with o or g the diphthong ov; 
with a, w. o with ei becomes ot. Hence — 

o-o/xtv") 

, > become ovuev, 

i-ofxev J '^ 



o-ere 


yj 


OVT£. 


6-0V(JL 1 






i-OVGL j 


if 


OV<JL. 


a-o/Jiev 


)j 


tojiev 


a-ov<ji 


» 


wai. 


6-£ig 


}y 


oig. 


6-H 


fi 


oT. 



Examples. 
C. F. Ojoa, see. 

6pa-(i) 6/0(5, opa-ojULEv 

6pa-ug bp^g, 6pa-ET£ 

6pa-u bpa, bpa-QVGL 



OptxyjULEV; 
bpCLTEf 

bpiJUai' 



22 GREEK EXERCISES 

C. F. aiTE, ask for 

aiTi-ii) aiTWf 
aire-eig aLTeig, 

aiT£-H aiTEl, 



aLTE-O/JLEV aiTOVfXEVy 
aiTE'ETE aiTE'lTE, 

aiTE-ovcTL aiTovai. 



C.F. ?»]Xo, emulate. 

Z,riko-ii} ZriXw, ZriXo-OfjLEv Zr\\ov}iEV, 

^riXo-Eig ^rjXotc^ ^rjXo-fre t^r^XovTE, 

^rf\o-EL Zvi^ot, 2*?Xo-ov(Tt ^rjXouo-t. 

Remark 3. The accusative of masc. and fem. 
nouns in o is made by v in the sing., and by vg 
in the plui\, added to the Crude Form. The ar- 
ticle and adjective are made ace. in the same w^ay. 

In the plur. the ovg becomes ovg.'^ Hence we 
have not rove avdpwTrovg, but rovg avOpioirovg. 
As to neuter words, see Rem. in Exerc. III. 

Example. 

Masc. C.F. avOpojTTO. A. S. avOpojTrov. A. P. avOpdJirovq. 
Fem. vr)(To. vr]<Tov. vrjaovg. 

Neut. poSo. po6ov. po^a. 



Masc. A. S. Tov avOpwTrov 
Neut. TO podov. 



With the Article. 

A. P. Tovg avOpojTTOvg. 
TO poda. 



* The letter v cannot stand before g, it is therefore struck 
out ; and when this takes place in a final syllable, the preceding 
vowel is always lengthened. In the middle of a word, the vowel 
is not lengthened except when g has been substituted for another 
consonant, or when another consonant besides the v has gone out. 
In all these cases the lengthening of the vowel appears to be a 
compensation for the loss of the consonants. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 23 

1. I send the messenger. Thou sendest the 
new garment to the general. The steward sends 
the slaves to the garden. We are pursuing the swift 
horses into the plain. Ye are leading the crowd 
into the park. The Athenians have the slingers 
in the camp. The youths carry the arms into the 
boat. The soldiers are not carrying the valuable 
prizes into the house. The brave bowmen pursue 
the slaves into the tower of the satrap. The slaves 
are running quickly into the plain of Castolus. 
We run quickly into the other garden with the 
youth. Artaxerxes is leading the army against 
Cyrus. We have the place. Ye have the forti- 
fied places. The soldiers of Cyrus have the lofty 
hills. The traitors flee to the hill. Clearchus does 
not lead the barbarians into the plain. I send the 
captain to Miletus in Ionia. =^ Thou art pursuing 
the children to Laurium in Attica. The youths 
bring the horses to Orchomenos in Boeotia. 

2. We are conquering the army of the allies. 
They are calling the generals into the bold citi- 
zen's garden. The philosopher is explaining 
the danger of the expedition. Do ye see the 
crowd on the tops of the hills? I hunt the 
animals in the beautiful park. Thou art pun- 
ishing the traitor too severely. They conquer the 



* In this and the following sentences " in " is to be translated 
by the genitive ; the article also is to be used with the names 
'* Ionia," &c. 



24 GREEK EXERCISES. 

barbarians in the beginning of the war. Thou 
art practising running. He is not laughing. I 
frighten the wild beasts in the middle of the field. 
Ye are asking for corn for the camels. Do we 
emulate the wisdom of the Grecian philosopher ? 
He does nothing correctly. 



XIV. — Present of Verbs increased or 

STRENGTHENED, 

Remark. The present and past imperfect 
tenses imply the incompleteness and continuance 
of an action. Neither of these tenses has any 
suffix apart from the personal terminations, but 
in them the Crude Form is frequently strength- 
ened by a modification of the final consonant, or 
by lengthening the vowel which precedes it, ac- 
cording to the following rules. 

1. In Crude Forms ending in mutes, 
t becomes ei, as Xitt, XetTr, Meave,' (or 7, as 
Tfn(5, rpl^f 'rub.') 

a becomes ry, as \aB, \r}0 ' escape notice." 
V becomes ev, as (j)vy, (j)Evy ' flee,' (and some- 
times V, as ipvXi i^vx * breathe.') 

These lengthenings of the vowel affect the 
future, the first aorist, and the perfects as well 
as the imperfect tenses. All the changes ex- 
plained in the following sections apply to the 
present and past imperfect tenses only. 



f 



GREEK EXERCISES. - 25 

2. TTT is substituted for tt, j3, and ^, as tutt, tvttt 
^ strike/ j3Xaj3, j3Xa7rr ^ hurt,' |0t<^, ^otTrr ' throw.' 

3. (7(7 or rr is substituted for k, 7, and x> ^^ 
(fivXaK, <j)v\a(T<T ' guard/ ray, ra(7(7 ' draw up,' 
Tapa\, Tapaa(T * disturb.' 

Z is substituted for y and ;)^, as oijuLtjy, oljjusjZ, 
* lament;' (7r£vax, o-reva? * groan.' 

4. (7(7 or rr is substituted for r and d, as, TrXar, 
7rXa(7(7 'smear;' KopvQ, Kopvcrcr 'put on a helmet.' 

2 is substituted for 3 and r, as jcojutS, kojuli^ 
' take care of;' ovofiar, ovojiiaZ ' name.' 

N.B. — When the vowel of a Crude Form ending 
in a mute is e, the vowel never, and the consonant 
seldom undergoes any change. 

5. X is doubled, as j3aX, j3aXX ' pelt.' 

av'\ CaiVf as (7rjjuav, crrifxaLv ^ give a 

lbecome< signal.' 

apj Vaip, as X'^P^ X^^P 'rejoice.' 

£v^ Jciv, as rev, rctv ' stretch.' 

epj \^^pf ^^ ^^^/o^ ^0£6jO 'waste.' 

tv becomes 7v, as KpXv, Kp~iv ' separate.' 

vv]^ (vv, as aavVf auvv 'ward off.' 

w >become< - ^ - t j > 

v/oj I vp, as (Tvp, (jvp drag. 

N.B. — Roots ending in ju generally remain un- 
changed. 

6. Some verbs are increased by the addition 
of (JK (con-esponding to the Latin sc, as in gno, 
gno-sc); or, if they end in a consonant, of lgk, as 
Ovriy Ovrj-GK * die,' kvp ivp-LGK ' find.' Sometimes 

D 



26' - GREEK EXERCISES. 

also, the first letter of the Crude Form is doubled 
with a following i; as rpw, Ti-Tpw-aK ^ wound/ 

7. Some verbs are increased by the syllable av 
added to the Crude Form, as aiaO, aiaO-av ^ per- 
ceive ;' a/uLapTf a/aapT-av ' miss,' ' err/ 

8. Some Crude Forms which have a short 
vowel are increased by adding av, and inserting 
a consonant before the final consonant. Before 
labials this inserted consonant is ^, before dentals 
V, before gutturals y ; as A a/3, Xa-jU-/3-av ^ take ;' 
XaOi Xa-v-0-av 'escape notice;' Oijj Oi-y-y-av 
' touch.'* 



Thou rejoicest in the prosperity of thy friends. 
The gods rejoice in sacrifices. Xerxes is col 
lecting an innumerable army. The enemies are 
not destroying the corn. Ye are leaving the 
camp of Cyrus with the deserters. The messen- 
gers of Cyrus flee to the river. The trumpeter 
gives the signal. The children hear the voice of 
their teacher. I hear thee. 

They pelt the house with stones.f The sol- 
diers pelt the boat from the towers. The trai- 



* Vide Remarks on the Alphabet for an explanation of the prin- 
ciples on which the changes of consonants mentioned in these rules 
depend. 

t " With," denoting the instrument, is to be translated by the 
dative. 



4 



GREEK EXERCISES. 27 

tors strike the brothers from horseback (say, from 
the horses). The Persian pelts us with stones. 
The slaves report this (tovto) to Cyrus. Ye re- 
port bad tidings'*^ concerning the army of the 
Athenians. 

Does Cyrus assemble the barbarians into the 
plain of Castolus? Ye are not enriching the friends 
of the queen. I wonder at Clearchus. Ye won- 
der at Orontes. We wonder at the messengers. 
The supperless sailors slay the bulls. 

Leonidas draws up the Lacedaemonians in 
the plain. The bowmen are guarding the hills. 
The soldier is guarding (the) road. They quickly 
proclaim these things.f The son immediately 
proclaims these things. The sailor is doing well 
(that is, is faring well). Am I not doing well ? 
The Athenians throw the barbarians into con- 
fusion. We are digging long ditches by the side 
of the river. They throw each other into con- 
fusion in the narrow roads. 

The general strikes the animal with his spear. 
The stewards strike the horse. The fear- 
ful messengers throw their arms into the river. 
The friends throw the corn into the boat. The 
cold wind injures the eyes of the queen. 

Artaxerxes dies in the battle. Cyrus wounds 
his brother. Thou teachest the tax-gatherer 
these things. Teachers teach, pupils learn. Thou 

* Neut. plur. of adjective. f Taura. 



28 GREEK EXERCISES. 

art deluding the young man. Ye are finding 
these things. Do ye notice, or do ye not notice, 
these things? Lysander is dying. 

The faithless rower learns this. Orontes has 
the plain allotted him. Thou hast the emi- 
nence allotted thee. The brothers have equal 
shares* allotted them. Cyrus receives the valu- 
able gifts. The Corinthians escape notice. The 
sisters learn this from the bowman. Does not 
the slinger hit the mark ? 



XV. — Future Tense, Accusative of Nouns 

IN A, AND OF the FeMININE ArTICLE, Vo- 

CATIVE OF Nouns in O and A. 

Remark 1. The future is formed by the letter o- 
added to the Crude Form. The person-endings 
are the same as in the present. 

Example. 

C.F. \v. Tense Formf \v<t. 

\v-(T-(j) I will loosen, Xv-rr-o/ttv We shall loosen, 

\v-a-tiQ Tho 1 wilt loosen, Xv-a-tri Ye will loosen, 

\v~(T-H He will loosen, Xv-a-ovat They will loosen. 

When the C. F. ends in a, t, or o, those vowels are 
generally lengthened before the a of the future ; 



* Neut. plur. of adjective. 

t T. F. will be used as the abbreviation of Tense Form. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 29 

a and e into 77, o into w. In the Attic dialect a 
preceded by f, f, or p, becomes a. 

With the consonants -y, k, x> ^^^ ^'^ com- 
bines to form the double consonant ^ : with j3, tt, 
and ^ it makes ^. Thus irpajcr becomes irpa^ ; 
8fwK(r, Sf(u$ ; Tapa\(T, rapa^. /BXajStr becomes 
(5\u\p : TVTTCT, TVip ', jpaijxT, ypaifj. 

Remark 2. There are several consonants 
which in Greek cannot stand immediately before 
(T ; the future of verbs ending in such consonants 
is made in two ways : either the final consonant 
is struck out, or the c is omitted. The following 
are the particular rules generally observed. 

1. Crude Forms ending in ^, r, or 0, omit the 
consonant ; thus davfiar makes fut. Oavfjiaa^ ; 
irXovTi^, enrich, ttXovtkt ; iriQ, long form, irud, 
persuade, tthcf. 

But some Crude Forms ending in tS, and a few 
others, have a future in which the o- also is 
omitted, and the vowels of the terminations are 
lengthened, as shewn in the following example. 

C. F. vo/xtS consider. 



vofiiawy 


VOjXUO 


V0jU<(70jU£V, 


VOfXLOVfXiV 


vo^iauQf 


VOfllUQ 


VOfJiKTETS, 


VOfXlUTE 


vofiLcrei, 


VOfllEL^ 


VO/ULKTOVCFlf 


vojuiovcri. 



This is commonly called the Attic future, being 
found chiefly in that dialect. 

2. As a general rule, or cannot stand imme- 
D 2 



30 GREEK EXERCISES. 

diately after the letters X, ju, v, p ; accordingly, in 
the earlier stages of the language the future of 
verbs ending in those consonants was made by 
adding <j with the connecting vowel e ; but the 
Greek language is opposed to having <t between 
two short vowels, and in many forms rejects it; 
hence the o- was omitted ; the next and final 
process was the contraction of the vowels accord- 
ing to the rules already given.^ 

Ea^ample. 
BaX throw — strike. 



(BaX-E-(Toj, /3tt\£-a>, /3aXw, 
/3a\-c-(7£if , ^aXe-eiQjPaXtig, 
(3aX-e-(Tfi, (3aXt-si, (5aXeij 



f3aX-e-(rofiev, jSaXe-oiisv, (SaXovfieVf 
f5aX'€-<T£T£, /SaXe-cre, /3aX£ir€, 
(3aX-e-(70V(n, (5aXe-ov<n, (SaXovffi. 



Remark 3. The accusative of nouns in a is 
made in the same way as that of nouns in o, in 
the sing, by v, and in the plur. by vg added to 
the Crude Form. 



* That the process here explained is not an imaginary one, but 
really took place in the language, there is abundant proof. In 
Homer we find such forms as oX-e-aoj (Od. v, 399), fiax-^-(T<T- 
ofiai : these are the full forms : other forms occur much more fre- 
quently in which the first step of the abbreviating process has taken 
place ; as jSaXew for (3aXu> (11.6. 403), ayyeXeovcri for ayyeXovat 
(II. t. 617 (613)). There is, moreover, nothing peculiar in the 
use of a connecting vowel in the future, for many verbs always had 
one (generally tj), and some verbs, whose futures are commonly 
made in a different manner, are not unfrequently found with <t and 
the connecting vowel tj. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 31 

In the plur. the v is dropped. Hence we have 
not veaviavgj but veavidg, not Qvpavg, but Ovpdg. 

The accusative of the feminine article is made 
in the same w^ay ; sing, rrjv, plur. rag. 

Read Rem. and Rules in Exerc. V. again. 

Ea;amples. 
Masc. C.F. veavia. A. S. veaviav. A. P. vtaviag. 

TTOXlTa. TToXlTTJV. TToXlTUg. 

Fem. 



9vpa. 


Ovpav. 


Ovpag. 


rpaTTsZa. 


rpairt'Cav. 


TpaTTi^ag 


Kiofia. 


KOJfllJV. 


KOJfiag. 



Remark 4. In the plural of all nouns, and 
in the singular of neuter nouns, the vocative is 
the same as the nominative. 

The vocative singular of masc. and fem. nouns 
in o w^as originally the same as the Crude Form. 
But the o has become an f, as in Latin. Of 
masculine nouns in a those which end in ra, and 
some others, have the voc. sing, the same as the 
Crude Form; the rest make it by lengthening 
the a, or changing it into rj, as in the nom. The 
voc. sing, of feminine nouns in a is the same 
as the nominative. The vocative being the case 
used in addressing or calling to a person or 
thing, there are many words which from their 
nature cannot have that case ; one of these words 
is the article. 



32 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



C.F. Trpo^ora traitor. 
TrpoSorrjg, 
npoSoTov, 
irpodory, 

TrpoCOTTjV, 

TrpoSora. 
C. F. ^aaikiaaa queen. 

^aaCKiGGriQ, 
(iaoCKKjat], 
(iaaCKiaaav, 
j3a(nXi(T(ra. 



Connected View of the Inflexions of 

Nouns in a and o. 
As the plural of nouns in a is the same in all 
classes, it is not repeated. 

C. F. TO TUfxia the steward. 

N. 6 Tafiiag, oi rafiiai, 

G. Tov TttfiioVf T<Dv raixiov, 

D. r<^ TUfii^, roig rafiiaig, 

A. TOV rafiiav, rovg rafiiag, 

V. ra^ia, rafnai. 

C.F. ra Ovaia the sacrifice. 
N. t) Ovffia, al Ovaiai, 

G. T-qg 9v<Tiag, tojv Ovffiwv, 

D. ry Ovffia, raig Ovaiaig, 

A. TT]v Ovffiav, rag Ovaiag, 

V. OvcTLU, Ovaiaif 

C. F. (jxova voice. 

N. (pOJVT], 

G. (pojvrjg, 
D. <p(i)vy, 
A. (pujvtjv, 

V. (p(i)VT]. 

C. F. oiKo household (Masc). C. F. to x^P^^ the place (Neut.). 
N. oiKog, oiKOi, N. TO x^piov. Ta xiopia, 

G. OlKOVf OlKUJVf G. TOV Xf^^P'OV, T<i)V XiOpHiiV, 

D. oiKi^, oiKoig, D. ry x'^P'-Vf '"^^^ X^P^^'C> 

A. oiKov, oiKovg, A. to x^P^ov, Ta %wpio, 

V. oi/ce, oiKoi. V. x^P'-^^t X^P'-^' 

When the final a or o of the Crude Form is 
preceded by f or o, the substantives or adjectives 
have their terminations contracted according to the 
rules already given ; thus oo becomes ov ; ooi, oi ; 
ea becomes d in the neuter and r} in the feminine. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 33 

Several substantives and adjectives in o have 
w instead of o, ov or a, and o^ instead of ot. This 
is called the Attic declension. 

Similarly to nouns in a and o are declined the 
relative pronoun 6 (M & N) a (F) ; — avro (M & 
N), avra (F) self, he, she, it (answering to the 
Latin eo, and sometimes to ipso) ; — to avro the 
same (M & N);— rovro (M & N), Tavra (F) 
this ; and aWo (M &: N) aXXa (F) other ; except 
that these words have no case-ending (v) in the 
neut. nom. and ace. singular, and that in the nom. 
(both sing, and plur.) masc. and fern, of tovto, 
the r is changed into the aspirate as in the article. 
The neut. nom. and ace. plural of tovto is ravra. 

In the following exercises, the first division contains verbs the 
future of which is made according to the 1st Remark ; the second, 
those whose futures are formed according to Rem. 2, Rule 1 ; and 
the third, those comprised in Rem. 2, Rule 2. 



1. I shall write this letter.* Thou wilt encircle 
the Persian's head with a beautiful wreath. We 
will send messengers to Thebes. Ye will lead them 
into the village with the heavy-armed. Darius 
will do well. With-the-aid-of the gods to whom 
ye sacrifice, ye will fare well. I will come soon. 
The satrap will come into the tent. These* sol- 
diers will bury the cowardly general. I will send 
the satrap back to the same government. Cyrus 
will throw the enemies into confusion. The 

* Use the article after the pronoun. 



34 GREEK EXERCISES. 

generals will draw up the soldiers who are pre- 
sent, for battle. Ye will soon turn the Lycians to 
flight. Thou wilt violate the truce which thou art 
now making. The barbarians will not pursue us 
into the river. I will send the soldiers and youths 
to the island. We will do this concerning Orontes. 
The wind will injure the young trees which ye 
are planting. The travellers will behold many 
wonderful (things). We will explain to him 
what^ we wish. Ye will easily conquer the 
faithless traitors. I will ask for the arms of 
the fearful deserters. Thou wilt practise the 
whole day.f Ye will emulate the valour of the 
bold satrap 

2. We will persuade the soldiers. The soldiers 
will place the general whom they love upon J the 
throne. I will persuade the islanders. Will ye 
assemble the good children inj the large field ? 
He will place the beautiful virgin inj the other 
boat. Thou wilt admire the other new gift from 
the citizen. 

Attic Future. — I shall consider this an 
honour. We shall hope for many good things 
from thee, O Clearchus. Thou wilt carry the 
load, O virgin, into the village which thou seest 
under the hill. The same vessel will carry the 
corn. Ye will bring the gold with other gifts. 



* Use neut. plur. of relative pi-onoun ** which." 
t Duration of time is expressed by the accusative. 
X Use the preposition eig. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 35 

We will not reproach thee with thy weakness, O 
queen. They will arm the horses with frontlets. 
Thou wilt not care for wars. Ye will not care 
for the war, O citizens. 

3. Truce orwar shall I report to her ? Thou wilt 
report war, O messenger. The satrap will imme- 
diately strike the slave with a spear. Whether 
will ye remain, or shall I report war from you, 
Lacedaemonians ? The generals will remain in 
this tent till noon. I will wait in the house till 
evening. Thou wilt send away the vessels to 
Aegina. Whether will ye send away the vessels 
to Naxos or to Lemnos ? The trumpeter will 
give the signal. We will distribute the corn to 
the soldiers. This judge will distribute the wine 
to the messengers in the house. The colonists 
will clear the land. The slave will not sow 
equally. The Persian will kill the youth with a 
sword, O Athenian. We will kill thee. Will ye 
shew the hidden money ? 



XVI. — Past Imperfect Tense; the Augment; 
Comparative and Superlative of Adjec- 
tives. 

Remark 1. The Past Imperfect is used in 
speaking of an action as continuing and incom- 
plete, or as habitually or frequently performed, 
in past time. 

Remark 2. The Past Imperfect is made from 
the Crude Form, or from the Increased Form, 



36 GREEK EXERCISES. 

where there is one (See Rem., Exerc. XIV.), by 
the addition of a prefix called the Augment, and 
by the following terminations. 

OV 1 OfliV 

eg 2 £r£ 

£(r dropped) 3 ov{r dropped). 

The jLt of the 1st singular, which is retained in 
Latin, has in this and many other tenses of the 
Greek verb become v. The r in the 3rd singular 
and plural is dropped.* EXvov, 1st singular, is 
the euphonic form of eXvo/j,, and eXvov, 3rd plural, 
is the euphonic form of eXvovr. 

Remark 3. The augment is confined to the 
Indicative mood, and to the past tenses of that 
mood ; viz. the past imperfect and past perfect, 
and the aorists. 

The augment is of two kinds; the syllabic, 
which is the vowel e prefixed to verbs begin- 
ning with a consonant ; and the temporal, 
which consists in lengthening the initial vowel 
of verbs commencing with a short vowel, accord- 
ing to the following table. 

a and e become rj, (e sometimes becomes ai.) 

becomes w. 

1 and V become 7 and v. 

When the verb begins with the diphthongs at or 
OL, the L is subscript in the tenses which take 
thje augment : thus, aiaO becomes yaO ; oix o^X' 

* See Remark 2 on the Alphabet. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



37 



Verbs beginning with long vowels, or with the 
diphthongs u and ev, rarely have an augment, 
and those beginning with ou, never. 

Verbs beginning with p, repeat the p after the 
augment ; as, pnrT, eppiirrov. 

Verbs compounded with prepositions, take the 
augment after the prepositions, which (except 
nepi and tt/oo) lose their final vowels before the 
augment : thus, aTro-crrfX becomes aTr-e-artXX. 
In irpo the o and e generally make ov. 

When a preposition ends in a consonant, that 
consonant is often changed before the initial con- 
sonant of the verb to which it is prefixed; thus 
Ev before labials becomes 6/i, before gutturals ay : 
but when the augment is inserted, the preposition 
resumes its proper form."^ 



Examples. 
C. F. \v. Imperf. T. F. e-\v. 



t-\v-ov I was loosening, 
(-\v-eg Thou wast loosening, 
e-\v-i He was loosening. 



e-\v-on£v We were loosening, 
e-Xv'tTt Ye were loosening, 
e-\v-ov They were loosening. 



C. F. TVTT. I. F. TVTTT. 

T.F. e-TVTTT. 

i-rVKT-OVy e-TVTTT-OflSV, 

e-TVTTT-eg, e-rvTrT-ere, 

t-TVTTT-e. S-TVTTT-OV. 



C.F. (TvX-Xey. T.F. ffvv-s-Xty. 

<7vv-e-Xey-0Vy (xvv-e-Xey-oixevy 

<Tvv-t-Xey-fg, ovv-t-Xfy-trt, 

(Tvv-£-Xsy-e. avv-t-Xey-ov. 



* Vide Remarks on the Alphabet for the particular rules. 



38 



GREEK EXERCISES. 





CONTRACT 


VERBS.* 






C. F. viKa. 


T. F. f'ViKa. 




t-VlKU-OV 


t-VlK(ji)V, 


e-viKOL-ofiev 


e-viKutfitv, 


e-viKa-eg 


e-vLKag^ 


l-VlKa-tTt 


f-viKart, 


f-viKa-f 


e-viKa. 


t-viKa-ov 


. t-VlKWV. 




C. F. aiTf . 


T. F. yTf. 




yTt-ov 


yrovv, 


yTt-ofjtev 


yTovfiev, 


yrt-eg 


. . yreic, 


yTe-STt 


yrelre, 


yTS-e 


7JTtl. 


yre-ov 


yTOVv. 




C. F. op9o. 


T. F. u)p9o. 




ojpOo'Ov 


MpOoVV, 


lOpOo-OfiSV 


bjpOovfievj 


Ojp9o-tQ 


. . lopOovg, 


WpOo-STS 


WpOoVTEy 


ojpBo-s 


lopOov. 


(i)p9o-ov 


wpOovv. 



Remark 2. There are two ways of forming 
the comparative and superlative of adjectives. 
Only one of these will be explained here, being 
that which applies to nearly all adjectives in o, 
and to many others. 

The comparative is made by adding repo (M. 
&; N.) or repa (F.) to the Crude Form of the 
simple adjective : the superlative by adding raro 
(M. & N.) or rara (F.) 

When the last syllable but one of the Crude 
Form is short, the o of the Crude Form is length 
ened in the comparative and superlative. If it 
were not, there would be a concurrence of short 
syllables unpleasant to the ear. 



J 



* Vide Rules for Contraction of Vowels, Exerc. XIII. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 39 

The neuter forms of the comparative and su- 
perlative adjective are used adverbially. 

Examples. 
C. F. TTioTo 'faithful,' Comp. Trtoro-rfpo. Sup. TnaTo-Taro. 
cro^o'wise.* (TO<})(i)-Tspo. <ro^w-raro. 

avaideg ' shameless.' avai^ta-repo avaiSear-raro. 



1. I was writing the letter in the tent, O sister. 
He was sending the messengers to Thebes. We 
were sending the husbandman to Cume. Ye 
were leading the citizens. The brothers used 
to sacrifice on the eminences. The rest were 
weeping in the tent. The Lacedaemonians were 
violating their oaths. The general spoke thus. 
The scout ran forward from the tree under which 
he was. 

2. The soldiers were burying the dead in the 
park. We used to consider thee to be wiser than* 
the other Athenians. The philosopher was the 
wisest of men. The brave islanders were ascending 
the eminences. With the aid of the gods the 
Athenians prospered (say, did well). The Per- 
sians were fleeing to the tent. The Rhodians 
used to shoot farther than the mark. The bar- 
barians were throwing (missiles) from the height, 
and wounding many of the enemies. Cyrus col- 
lected the most able of his friends. The sailor 



* "Than," after a comparative, is expressed by the genitive of 
the word following it. 



40 GREEK EXERCISES. 

was very skilful about nautical affairs.* I am 
more acquainted with the country than the Per- 
sian (is). Tlie judges are the most faithful of 
my (the) friends. 

3. They were asking for gold and silver. We 
were conquering all the enemies of the Athenians. 
I did not let my house for hire. He was hunting 
the wild asses in the desert. Thou wast waging 
war against the faithless deserters. Ye were 
punishing the more shameless husbandmen. They 
never did any thing correctly. The scouts were 
seeking the camp of the enemy. The master was 
summoning the faithless slaves. We were making 
the hill bare of trees. 



XVII. — Second Aorist ; Consonant, or Sepa- 
rable Declension. 

Remark 1. The Greek term 'Aorist' means 
indefinite. In the Indicative, the. aorist tense is 
the indefinite past, describing an action as past, 
but not precisely defining the time of its per- 
formance. It is used only in speaking o{ single 
completed actions, not of continuing actions, 
nor of such as habitually took place.-f- 



* Neuter plural of adjective with article. 

t The aorist is in most cases equivalent to the past tense of the 
English verb ; but far from universally so, inasmuch as we com- 
monly use that tense when speaking of habitual or repeated 



GREEK EXERCISES. 41 

There are two forms for this tense. One form 
is called the 1st aorist; the other, the 2nd aorist. 
These names (1st and 2nd) must not be under- 
stood as implying that the 1st is the older form 
of the aorist, for the contrary is probably the 
fact; they are used merely to distinguish the two 
forms readily. It is important to remark also 
that there is no difference whatever in the signifi- 
cation of the two aorists. 

The 2nd aorist is made by prefixing the aug- 
ment, as in the past imperfect, and by adding the 
same person-endings to the Crude Form. 

The difference in form between the past imper- 
fect and the 2nd aorist is, that in the former (the 
past incomplete), as in the present incomplete, the 
Increased Form is used ; in the aorist, the Crude 
Form. The 2nd aorist bears the same relation to 
the Crude Form as the past imperfect to the In- 
creased Form. Verbs which have no Increased 
Form have no aorist of this kind, for in such verbs 
the 2nd aorist would have the same form as the 
past imperfect ; but not all verbs which have an 

actions. The English present perfect is not unfrequently em- 
ployed in speaking of a single completed action in past time : and 
hence the Greek aorist is sometimes to be translated by that tense. 
Thus in the sentence, " I have often heard him speak," the thing 
spoken of not being habitual, nor repeated at the same time, but 
each "hearing" being distinct and unconnected with all the 
others, we must use the aorist : TroXKuKig avrov XeyovTog 
TjKovcra. The proper use of the Greek perfect will be hereafter 
explained. 

E 2 



42 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Increased Form have a 2nd aorist. No rules can 
be given for determining what verbs have the 
2nd aorist : this can be learned only by practice 
and from lexicons. Verbs which have not the 
2nd, take the 1st aorist : a very few verbs have 
both. 

Examples. 



C.F. XiTT. 


I.F. X£^7r. 


Aor. T.F. £-Xt7r. 
1st Pers. £-Xt7r-ov. 
Aor. T. F. £-(^v7. 

„ €-/za0. 

„ £-Kpay. 


Imp. T.F. £-X£<7r. 
1st Pers. £-X£t7r-ov. 
Imp. T.F. e-<l)£vy. 

„ e-fiavOav. 

„ E-KpaZ, 



Remark 2. The Consonant-declension is so 
called because most nouns declined according to 
it end in a consonant. (The rest end in the 
vowel If V, or w) It is also called the Separable 
Declension, because the case-endings can be 
separated from the Crude Form, leaving it entire, 
more easily than in the a and o declension. 

The different cases of masc. and fern, nouns are 
made by the following terminations added to the 
Crude Form. 



Sing. 




Plur. 


c 


Nom. 


€C 


C. F. or g 


Voc. 


^^ 


oc 


Gen. 


(jJV 


I 


Dat. 


ai 


a 

er u or i, V ^ 




(ag. 


Ace. 


\ generally vg, i. e. g with 




. the vowel lengthened. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 43 



I. EXAMPLE OF NOUN ENDING IN A CONSO- 
NANT. 



C.F. 


KopaK ' 


' a crow.' 


KopaK-g = Kopa^ 


N. 


KOpaK-eg 


KOpaK-g = KOpa^ 


V. 


KopaK-eg 


KOpaK-OQ 


G. 


KOpaK-OJV 


KopaK-i 


D. 


KOpaK-(TL = KOpaKi 


KopaK-a 


A. 


KOpaK-ag. 



The rules given in reference to the combination 
of or with the various classes of consonants in 
Rem. 1, ExERC. XV., are mostly applicable to the 
nom. sing, and dat. plur. of nouns ending in a 
consonant. The following rules, however, are 
also necessary in reference to those cases. 

1. Nouns ending in v or p do not take tr in the 
nominative, and if a short vowel precede the v or 
p in a masc. or fem. noun, it is lengthened ; thus 
pr}Top becomes prjrwp; avep, avr^p; TrarfjO, waTtip; 
TToijuiev, TTotjurjv; ^aiiuLov^ Satjuwv. In the dat. plur. 
V is dropped before the ai ; but in nouns ending 
in p no change is made in the Crude Form in 
that case, except in those which end in £p, which 
transpose ep into pa, as iranp, Trarpaai. 

2. Nouns ending in ovt make the nom. sing, by 
dropping r and lengthening the o. Thus yspovr 
becomes yepujv. In the dat. plur. vr are struck 
out before the en, and the o is lengthened into ov ; 
yepovT-ai becomes y^povcn. 



44 GREEK EXERCISES. 

3. Masc. nouns ending in avr make the 
nom. sing, by adding o-, vr are dropped, and 
the a is lengthened. The dat. plur. is made in 
the same way; yiyawj N.S. yiydg; D.P. yi- 
yaai. 

4. Masc. and fern, adjectives ending in ^g make 
the nom. sing, in rjc '- in the other cases the <r 
coming between two vowels is dropped, and the 
usual contractions take place ; hence, in the ace. 
sing. £a becomes i). Neuter substantives in cc 
make the nom. sing, in og ; the nom. plur. in r\ ; 
the neut. nom. sing, of adjectives is the same as 
the Crude Form. The only masc. substantives 
of this kind are proper names of men derived 
from neater nouns, and there are no fem. sub- 
stantives properly so called, but a few adjectives 
become so by the ellipse of a fem. subtantive, as 
rpLr]pr\Qy which is vavg Tpirjprjg, The adjectives 
and neut. substantives are numerous. 



Ea^amples. 
aXrjOeg, true. Masc. and Fem. 

aXrjOrjQ N. a\ri9{e(T-£Q,eeg)tic 

a\Ti9{e(T-og,eog)-ovQ G. a\i]9(e(T-ojv,eu)v)-(ov 

a\r]9{e<7-i,ti)-ei D. a\i]9(£(T-(n)-£<n 

aXT}B{e(T-a,ea)-ij A. a\t)9{e<T-ag,eag)-eLg 



av9£g,* a flower. 

Neut. 
av9og av9r] 
av9ovg av9ii)v 
av9ei av9e<Ti 
av9og av9r}. 



♦ Compare with this the Latin neuter nouns in es and os, both 
of which classes make the nominative singular in us, as genus, 
tempus. In Latin, instead of striking out the * in the other 
cases, it is changed into r : a similar change takes place in many 
parts of the Latin verb. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 45 

6. Similarly are declined a few feminine nouns 
in oc, nom. sing, wg or w. 



II. EXAMPLE OF NOUN 


ENDING IN V. 


C.F. 


ixOv ' a 


fish.' 


ix9v-Q 


N. 


iX^v-^g 


ixOv 


V. 


ixOv-eg 


ixOv-og 


G. 


ix0v-(jjv 


IX^V-L 


D. 


ixOv-ai 


ixOv-v 


A. 


iX^^Q or ixOv-ag. 



III. EXAMPLE OF NOUN ENDING IN I. 

In all cases of nouns ending in f, except the 
nominative, vocative, and accusative singular, the 
I of the Crude Form becomes e, and then the 
ordinary contractions take place. 7roXe'i=7ro\eif 
TroXe-sg=7roXeig, iro\e-ag=^7ro\eig. The last is 
not a regular contraction, but whenever the nom. 
and accus. plural are both contracted, the ace. 
is made the same as the nom. 

C. F. TToXi, fem. ' a city.' 



TToXig 


N. 


woXeig 


TToXl 


V. 


TToXsig 


TToXswg 


G. 


TToXstjJV 


iroXei 


D. 


TToXetTi 


TToXlV 


A. 


iroXsig. 



A few nouns ending in v are declined exactly 
like those ending in i : that is, the v is changed 
into £ in all cases except the nominative, accu- 
sative, and vocative singular ; and the same con- 



46 GREEK EXERCISES. 

tractions take place : so 7rr/x^> ^ cubit. In the 
same way are declined adjectives ending in v, 
except that the genitive singular ends in og, not 
in wg ; in the neut. the nom. singular is the same 
as the Crude Form, and in the plural sa remains 
uncontracted. So jXvkv, * sweet/ 



The vocative case of nouns of this declension 
is either flectionless, being the Crude Form 
(which is the case with all nouns in v and t), or 
the same as the nominative. 

But when the Crude Form ends in a consonant 
which cannot stand at the end of a word, it is 
dropped to make the vocative, unless that case 
is the same as the nominative. Thus the voc. of 
TTatS, boy, is wai : of yiyavr, yiyav. Avqkt, king, 
has two vocatives, ava and ava^. 



I left the country of the Molossians. Thou 
didst leave the plain of Castolus. The Persian 
fled out of the camp. Some remained in the 
village, others fled.'^ Ye left the city and we fled 
towards the river. The shepherds hit the wolf 
with stones. Cyrus took Tissaphernes as a true 
friend. The Cilician woman took pledges. The 



* Some ... others, oifxev ... aide — the particles /zei/ and df are 
used chiefly to point out the words or clauses opposed to each 
other. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 47 

Athenians entered into the cities on the same day 
(dat.). Cyrus received the refugees with the old 
men. Those of (out of) the market-place left 
their most valuable merchandise for the refugees. 
We learnt these things from the shepherds. Thou 
didst learn these more necessary things from the 
Thracian, O boy. The boys learnt these things 
fiom the commanders of the city. The disease 
escaped the notice of the physician. Xenophon 
had the village and the mountains allotted him. 
I had the command of these nations allotted me. 
The boys came to the door of the house with the 
fishes. The commander, who was very fond of 
danger, died in the war, O old man. Many of 
the Greeks died in the battle, O Xenophon. The 
sons of the old man hit the mark. The youth 
came into the village in which the refugee was. 
Ye threw away your shields in the villages of the 
Thracians. I lost two hundred soldiers. Not 
many of them escaped the notice of the Greeks. 



XVIII. — First Aorist. 

Remark. The other form of the aorist tense, 
commonly called the First Aorist, is made by the 
augment prefixed,* and the syllable o-a affixed to 



* Vide ExERC. XVI. for the rules respecting the augment. 



48 GREEK EXERCISES. 

the Crude Form, with the following termina- 
tions. 



Sing. 




Plur. 


(ju dropped*) 


1. 


fXEV 


c 


2. 


TE 


(r dropped''^) 


3. 


v{t dropped*), 



In the 3rd singular the a of the Tense Form 
becomes e. 

The remarks made in Exerc. XV. respecting 
the changes both of vowels and consonants which 
take place before the a of the future apply of 
course to this tense also ; the following differ- 
ences, however, between the two tenses are to be 
noted. 

1st. All verbs ending in S make the 1st aorist 
by dropping the ^ before the o- of the suffix, 
which is retained. 

2nd. Verbs ending in X, /x, v, p, add a only to 
make the tense form of the 1st aorist, and 
lengthen the vowel of the Crude Form, as shewn 
in the following table.f 



* Vide Rem, 2 on the Alphabet, and compare with the full 
forms the Latin terminations, as shewn in such words as ama-ba-m, 
ama-h-at, ama-ba-nt. 

t It has been suggested that probably the ca was originally 
added ; then the a assimilated to the final consonant of the Crude 
Form ; and lastly, the first of the two consonants omitted, to 
compensate for which the vowel of the root was lengthened, 
e.g. e-yafi-cra, e-yafi-fia, £-yT]f^a. This explanation, however, 
may be questioned. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 49 



a becomes rj or a, as 



ydfi 


marry Is 


t A. t-ynn-a. 


KBpdav 


gain 


e-Kspddv-a. 


(TTeK 


send 


e-oraX-a. 


KpXv 


separate 


s-Kplv-a. 


afxvv 


ward off 


rj-fxvv-a. 



Example. 
C.F. \v. T.F. B-Xv-aa. 
e-\v-(Ta I loosened, t-Xv-ara-fiiv We loosened, 

e-\v-<Ta-Q Thou loosenedst, s-Xv-tra-re Ye loosened, 
t'Xv-<Ts He loosened, e-Xv-<Ta-v They loosened. 

Similarly with C.F. opOo, T.F. wpOw-aa; C.F. 
TTpay, T.F. e-TTpa^a; C.F. vojut^, T.F. e-vo/xt-ca ; 
C.F. eXa, T.F. ijXa-cra. 



1. I did not violate the truce. Thou didst vio- 
late the truce. We sent the messenger immedi- 
ately to Thebes in Boeotia. The Greeks buried 
their commander in Laconia. The impudent 
messenger spoke to the heralds as follows (say, 
these things). His mother sent him back again 
to his goverament with the shieldmen and rear- 
guards. After this most dreadful battle the Greeks 
and the heralds sailed away to the island. The 
Athenians sent the herald back to Athens. We 
made an expedition against Croesus with the 
Greeks. The old man shut the gates of the city. The 
Thracian struck the commander of the village. 
The Greeks burnt down the palace. We wrote 
the letters immediately. The commander of the 
village cut down the trees on the mountain. 



50 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



The same traveller burnt down some trees, and cut 
down others.* We turned the three thousand to 
flight. Cyrus marched through the plain to 
Tarsi, a city of Cilicia. Cyrus sent with the Ci- 
lician woman Menon and his soldiers. Xenias, the 
Arcadian, and the Greeks did these things in the 
march. Ye threw each other into confusion in the 
very narrowf roads. Cyrus appointed a captain 
over each of the stations. We wondered at the 
folly of the herald. The colonists enriched the 
shepherds. Ye placed many good things upon 
the tables. I easily conquered the heavy-armed 
men in the battle. The commander punished the 
deserters severely (heavily). Did ye demand the 
arms of the Greeks ? These disciples of the philo- 
sophers often imitated their masters. The scout 
expended the money of the captain. 

2. He reported the other things eagerly to the 
Mede. Suitable messengers reported the mat- 
tersj from the barbarians to the Greeks. They 
remained five days in the country of the Cardu- 
chians. There we remained seven days. He sent 
away the vessels to Aegina. The trumpeter gave 
the signal with the trumpet to the Greeks. We 
purified the army. He himself killed the bear. 
Didst thou kill the wolf ? I distributed the corn 
and the flowers to the soldiers. The ambassadors 



* Vide note, p. 46. f Use the superlative. 

X Neut. plur. of art. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 51 

remained in the palace till evening. The slaves 
warded ofF the attack. The husbandmen did not 
sow equally. 

XIX. — Present Perfect ; Reduplication — 
Neuter Nouns of the Consonant De- 
clension. 

Remark 1. This tense generally corresponds 
to the English present perfect, as, " They have 
finished the work," — but not always (vide note, 
p. 40). The Greek pres. perf. is strictly used only 
in speaking of an action, &c. the result of which 
still continues. 

Remark 2. The pres. perfect is made from the 
Crude Form by a prefix called the reduplication, 
which in verbs beginning with a consonant consists 
of that consonant and the connecting vowel e, and 
in verbs beginning with a vowel is the same as the 
temporal augment ;* and by suffixing /ca, a, or a. 

The person-endings are like those of the 1st 
aorist except that of the 3rd plural. 

(ju dropped) 1. jufv. 

C 2. r£. 

(r dropped) 3. {a)(TL, 

As in the 1st aorist, the ji and t are dropped, and 
in the 3rd sing, the a of the Tense-Form becomes 
€. Hence we have not XcXuKar, but XcXuke. 

* These are the general rules, the exceptions will be explained 
in the following remarks. 



52 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Example, 

C.F. \v. T.F. \t-\v-Ka. 

Xe-Xv-Ka I have loosened, Xe-Xv-Ka-fiev We have loosened, 

Xe-Xu-Ka-e Thou hast loosened, Xe-Xv-Ka-Ts Ye have loosened, 

Xe-Xv-Ke He has loosened, Xe-Xv-Kd-ai They have loosened. 

Similarly C.F. tvtt. — T.F. TETv(pa (= rervw a); 
C.F. ypacj) — T.F. ycyjoa^a ( — ye-y/oo^ «) ; C.F. 

(TTpaT£V T.F. £(TTpaT£VKa; C.F. TTOtf — T.F. 

TreTTOirjKa ; C. F. opOof T. F. wpOwKa, 

Remark 3. The following general rules are 
to be observed in reference to the reduplication ; 
but there are many exceptions to some of them. 

1. Verbs beginning with an aspirated consonant 
take the corresponding thin letter in the redu- 
plication ; thus, 9v ' sacrifice ' becomes rSvKa ; 
(pov^v, 7rs(l>ov£VKa ; xpycro, KSXpvaioKa. 

2. Verbs beginning with p take only the aug- 
ment (the p being doubled) ; pacj) ' sew ' makes 
perfect eppa(l)a.^ 

3. Verbs which begin with a double consonant 
or with two consonants, the latter of which is not 
a liquid, do not receive the reduplication, but only 
the syllabic augment. 

4. The reduplication, or the augment which 
takes its place, is not confined to the indicative 
mood, as is the case with the augment properly 

* It seems probable that in these verbs the reduphcation was at 
first regularly prefixed ; but the liquids have a great tendency to 
change places with the vowels, so that pepacp might easily become 
(ppwp. This conjecture is confirmed by the occurrence of the 
form pepvTTwfieva in Odyss. ^. 59. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 53 

SO called, but belongs to all the perfect forms of 
the verb, infinitives and participles included. 

Remark 4. The following are the general 
rules relative to the suffixes of this tense. 

1. Ka is used when the Crude Form ends in a 
vowel, liquid, or dental : a, e, and o are generally 
lengthened before the suffix, as in the 1st aorist ; 
and a dental is dropped, jca may be added after 
any consonant by means of the vowel jj ; as from 
fxaOj rvXf are formed jue-imaOrjKaf r£-ru;)(rjica. 

2. a is added to verbs ending in an unaspi- 
rated labial or guttural, with which the breathing 
of the suffix combines, forming the corresponding 
aspirated letter; thus /3Xaj3 becomes jStjSXa^a; 
TTpay, ir^Trpa^a. 

3. a is used when the Crude Form ends in an 
aspirated consonant. 

4. Many verbs not ending in aspirated conso- 
nants take the suffix a ; these are called 2nd 
perfects, and often have an intransitive or passive 
meaning : this is especially the case with those 
verbs which have both perfects : the 1st perf» 
generally having a transitive, the 2nd, an intran- 
sitive or passive signification: thus, 1st perf 
oX-(t>X-£-Ka ^ I have destroyed ;' 2nd perf. oX-wX-a 
' I have perished.' But in many instances even 
the 1st perfect has an intransitive meaning : thus, 
from <^u 'produce' comes 1st perf. Tre-^v-ica * I 
was produced ' or * born.' 

Remark 5. The vowel of the Crude Form is 
subject to the following changes in the perfects. 
F 2 



54 GREEK EXERCISES. 

1. € always becomes o in the 2nd perf. : <^0£|O 
* destroy ;' 2nd perf. £-(f>0op'a. 

2. E before a liquid in monosyllabic words be- 
comes a in the 1st perf. : dreX, 1st perf. e-araX-Ka. 

3. When a root has a short form with t, and a 
long form with sl (vide p. 24) the 1st perf. has ei, 
but the 2nd oi : e. g. iriO ; 1st perf. Trc-Tret-ica ; 2nd 
perf. Tre-iroiO-a. 

4. When a monosyllabic root has a long form, 
that form is used in the 2nd perf. : e. g. (f>vy ; 
2nd perf. we-tpevy-a : but in disyllabic roots of 
the same kind, the 2nd perf. has the short form : 
e.g. eXvO 'come;' long form, iXevO ; 2nd perf. 
eX-YiXvO-a. 

Remark 6. Neuter nouns of the consonant 
declension differ from masculine and feminine 
nouns in the nominative and accusative cases only. 

In the nominative singular they have no case- 
ending. The nominative and accusative plural 
are made by the suffix a. 

The terminations of the other cases are the 
same as those of masculine and feminine nouns. 
Example. 
C. F. TTpayfiar * an affair.'^ 



TTpajfULa 


N. 


irpayfxaT-a 


irpayjia 


V. 


irpayfxar-a 


Trpayfiar-og 


G. 


TrpajjLaT-tJV 


irpayfiaT-L 


D. 


irpayfxa-aL 


irpayfia 


A. 


wpayfxuT-a 



* The T of the Crude Form is lost in Trpay/xa, because it 



GREEK EXERCISES. 55 

I have violated this truce. Cyrus is dead (has 
died). We have learnt the Persian language. 
The boys have learnt the Greek language. We 
have devised these things. The soldiers have 
plotted against us. I have sought for you all 
day. The enemies have entered the fortifica- 
tion. We have picked up the arrows. I have 
planted the trees in the park w^hich is full of 
flowers. Thou hast taught me this. The bar- 
barians have taught us avarice. The satrap has 
sent away the same vessels to the Hellespont. 
The army has plundered the citizens. The ge- 
nerals are dead. I have written the letters. 
The enemies have murdered a hundred citi- 
zens. Who has seen the old man? Ye have 
done^ well. The traitors have reported these 
things. The trumpeter has collected a crowd in 
the market-place. Pausanias has fled to Tegea. 
The rest of the women have fled to the deep 
river. I have sent the messengers to Sparta. 
The judges have assigned one share to each-man 
by lot. We have asked for the letter which the 
herald was carrying to Cyrus. The barbarians 
have made an expedition against the Corinthians. 
I have sacrificed many victims for you. Aga- 
memnon has given more valuable presents to me. 
The whole army has perished.* The oars 
are fixed in the ground.* The staff is broken.* 



cannot stand at the end of a word ; and it is lost in irpayfiaffi 
because it cannot stand before <r. 
* In these tenses the 2nd perfect is to be used. 



56 GREEK EXERCISES. 

I have wounded the commander in the thigh.* 
Seuthes has enriched him. The Greeks have en- 
riched their own commander. Ye have con- 
quered the cowardly deserters. The heralds have 
explained the wish of the general to the Greeks. 
We have destroyed many very valuable wares. 
The old man has persuaded the mother of the 
queen. 



XX.— Past Perfect: Nouns in EY (EF). 

Remark 1. The tense form of the past perfect 
differs from that of the present perfect in having 
the syllabic augment as well as the reduplication 
prefixed (the augment, however, being here, as in 
all other cases, confined to the indicative), and in 
the suflSx, which for the past perfect is kei, ct, or 
£1. All the rules given respecting the present per- 
fect apply to this tense also. When the redupli- 
cation is reduced to the augment, the prefix of 
the past is the same as that of the present 
perfect. 

The person-endings are the following. 

V 1 . fxev 

g 2. rt 

(r dropped) 3. aav 



* Limiting words, such as "thigh" in this sentence, are put 
in the accusative. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 57 

Example.* 
e-\i-\v-Kei-v I had loosened, e-Xt-Xv-Kei-fiev We had loosened, 
t-\s-Xv-KH-g Thou hadst loos- e-Xe-Xv-Ksi-re Ye had loosened, 

ened, 
s-Xe-Xv-Ket He had loos- e-Xe-Xv-Ksi-<Tav They had loos- 
ened, ened. 

Similarly C.F. tvtt; T. F. £TeTV(f)£i ( = £r£ru7r It)* 
C.F. ypa(p ; T.F. ey£ypa(f)£i { = eyey pa(l> ei). C.F. 
(TTpaTsv; T. F. a(TTpaT£VKei. 

Remark 2. Nouns in sv differ somewhat from 
other nouns of the separable declension from this 
circumstance. The v was originally a F, and 
when that character fell into disuse, the v was 
substituted for it in some of the cases, and it was 
dropped altogether in the others. In the dative 
singular and nominative plural, and sometimes 
also in the accusative plural, the £ and the vowel of 
the termination coalesce to form the diphthong 

£1. 

C. F. jSao-tXft; or jSao-iXfF ' a king.' 



/3ao-fX£KC 


N. 


j3a(7fX££c, contracted j5a(nX£ig. 


f^acn\£v 


V. 


j5a(n\££gj contracted (5a(nX£tg. 


j5a(n\£cog 


G. 


jSao-tXfwv. 


f^aaiXei 


D. 


j3a(7fX£UO-t. 


|3a(TfX£a 


A. 


|3aa"tXfac, contracted (3acnX£ig, 



* The forms here given are those found in most editions of the 
Greek writers ; but the following are the correct Attic termina- 
tions : t], tjg or fif , ft ; e/xev, ere, e(Tav ; as, eXtXvKT], tXeXvKrjg, 
eXeXvKti ; eXsXvicsfxsv, eXeXvKSTe, eXeXvKStrav. In the 3rd plural 
the termination eaav generally appears in the best MSS., and is 
restored in all recent editions. 



58 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Ye had never violated the truce. Thou hadst 
sought for the pebble in the vineyard. The scouts 
had found the footsteps of many horses. We and 
the boys had learnt the Persian language. The 
lady had devised these things. The strangers 
had entered the villages in the country of the 
Phrygians. The Greeks had lighted many fires 
on the eminences on this night. This satrap 
had sailed away to Ephesus. The army had 
plundered the fugitives. He himself had taught 
the youths avarice. We had planted the trees 
which were in the park. I had seen this old man. 
Pausanias had fled to Tegea. The priest had put 
on a woman's robe. Thou hadst sacrificed to 
Athene. Ye had enriched the commander in this 
war. I had sacrificed many victims for them. 
Agamemnon had sacrificed in Aulis. I had sent 
these messengers to Sparta. We had sent that 
letter to Cyrus. Thou hadst wounded me in the 
thigh. The Greeks had shot farther than the 
Persians. The boys had fled with the shepherds 
from the mountains into the meadow. Ye had 
made an expedition against the Athenians in this 
war. The thieves had assigned their shares by 
lot. The workmen had depopulated the country. 
Cyrus had waged war against his own brother. 
The boy's mother had been ill until midnight. 
I had hunted the fox in the meadow. The 
assistants had collected all the images. The 
unjust steward had reported the death of the 



GREEK EXERCISES. 59 

horses to the master. The cold had destroyed all 
the younger trees upon the hill. 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE 
MOODS. 

The forms of the verb arranged into these two 
classes are those found in dependent sentences 
only ; the difference between the subjunctive and 
optative being, that the tenses of the former are 
SiWpresent ; those of the latter, 2i\\past : in reality, 
they form but one mood, answering to the Latin 
subj unctive. 

Both moods generally imply some uncertainty, 
either in the action itself or in its circumstances. 



XXI. — Tenses of the Subjunctive. 

Remark 1. There are three tenses in this 
mood : the present imperfect, the present perfect, 
and the present indefinite (or aorist) ; as in the 
indicative the aorist may have two forms, distin- 
guished as 1st and 2nd. 

Remark 2. The Tense Forms of the subjunc- 
tive are the same as those of the indicative, ex- 
cept that they have no augment, and that the a 
of the 1st aor. and perfect disappears before the 
subjunctive terminations. 

Remark 3. The personal terminations are the 



60 GREEK EXERCISES. 

same in all the subjunctive tenses, being those of 
the present imperfect indicative, except that the 
connecting vowels are long, which is the distin- 
guishing characteristic of the forms of the sub- 
junctive. 

Personal Terminations of the Subjunctive. 

1. 2. 3. 
Sing. a> ^c p 



1. 2. 3. 
Plur. wjUEv r}TE (jj<t 



In the 2nd and 3rd sing, the eig and ei of the 
indie, become riig and rji ; but when the first vowel 
of a diphthong, the second of which is i, is length- 
ened, the L is always subscript. 

Remark 4. The subjunctive is used when the 
principal verb is a present or future tense, but it 
is never employed in reporting the words of 
another person. 

I. PRESENT IMPERFECT. 

Examples. 



of fc> be. 



ay-w, ay-cjjU£v, 




WfJLSV, 


ay-r?c, ay-rjrf. 


k, 


^T£, 


ay-Tfy ay-u)<TL. 


^, 


WCTl. 



CONTRACT VERBS. 



1. a absorbs r), and is absorbed by w. 

2. € is absorbed into r? and w. 

3. o combines with r} to form w ; with y to form 
; it is absorbed by w. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 73 

action already begun, nor in speaking of repeated 
or habitual actions. The aor. imperative is very 
rarely used in prohibitions. 



Do thou then advise us what seems best to you. 
Say what you think, sailors. Let them explain 
to you their sorrows. Pity me, the unfortunate, 
oh brave soldier. Let the slave bid the husband- 
men to be present. Take the sword, oh most 
faithful friends. Let the captains draw up the 
heavy-armed men. Report to the teacher the 
reply of the disciple. Come to this city, oh 
wisest of physicians. Let the soldiers kill the 
prisoners. Expect the severest punishment on 
account of thy villanies, oh robber. Leave the 
corn in the waggon, ob travellers. Let the 
refugees hunt the wild asses in the desert to- 
morrow. Learn the Greek language diligently, 
oh young men. Oh queen, go to war against 
the cruel Thracians. Let the stranger walk 
through the beautiful park which is full of lofty 
trees. Burn down, oh Athenians, the palace of 
the Persian commander. 



XXIV. — Infinitives. 

Remark 1. The infinitive, as its name denotes, 
is the form of the verb which is most general in its 
signification, having no reference to person or 

H 



74 GREEK EXERCISES. 

mood : it is, in fact,]a neuter abstract substantive. 
Hence it is in Greek frequently used with the 
article, and may be the subject or object of a 
verb, or governed by a preposition, or in any way 
in which a noun is governed. 

Remark 2. There are four active infinitives : 
the imperfect, the perfect, the future, and the 
aorist ; the latter has two forms, first and second. 

Remark 3. The original suffix of all the in- 
finitives was fievaif with the connecting vowel, 
e-fxevai. In some forms the syllable jU£ is omitted ; 
in others the syllable ai is dropped and cjutv 
contracted into eiv. 

Remark 4. In the exercises on the infinitives, 
dependent sentences are to be translated by the 
accusative of the subject and the infinitive of the 
verb precisely as in Latin. 

I. IMPERFECT. 

The suflSx is eiv added to the Crude Form, or 
where there is one to the increased form. The ter- 
minations after contraction are av, ttv, and ovv. 

Examples. 
Av, \v-£Lv, to loosen, or to be loosening ; Xafx^av, 

Xafifdav-eiv ; viKa, vlkclv ; ^tXe, (^nXuv ; ^tjXo, 

^r]\ovv. Etvat, infinitive of fc- 

This infinitive is used when the action is 
spoken of as going on at the same time as the 
action expressed by the principal verb, or when a 
continued or repeated action is described. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 75 

The scouts reported that the servants were 
labouring diligently. I hear that the more power- 
ful king is burning up the villages in the country. 
We were about to advise thee to punish the robber. 
I thought thaf you were to me both country and 
friends and allies. This was another pretext to 
Cyrus for assembling* an army. The heralds wish 
to leave the camp immediately. The old men 
advised the king to ask for the same vessels. I 
wish to conquer the enemy. There were no lon- 
ger provisions to sell. Xenophon left the half of 
the army with the horsemen to guard the camp, 
and to seek for the deserters. It is not (possible) 
to lead back these Greeks. The interpreter advised 
us to let the house. There is a difficulty in mak- 
ing war (say, to make war) without the consent 
of Cyrus. We conjectured that they were march- 
ing. The youth is most skilful both in speaking 
and in acting (say, to speak and to act). It is 
possible to enrich the city. We will permit you 
to take provisions from (say, out of) the country, 
and to hunt the wild beasts. 

II. FUTURE. 

The suffix is eiv added to the tense form of the 
future. In verbs ending in X, ju, v, pj the origi- 
nal connecting vowel £ (vide p. 30) is contracted 
with this suffix. 

* Literally, " of the to assemble," the article being dependent 
on irpo^aaig. 



76 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Examples. 
i\v, \v-(T-£iv, to be about to loosen ; irpay, 7r/oa5- 
uv ; viKay vLKr}-(T-£iv ; aire, air-q-a-eiv ; orjXo, 
Sr}X(ji)-(T-eiv ; (TTcX-E-Efv, oTtX-cTv ; vefJL-e-iiv, 
vifiuv. E(j£(TOaLy future infinitive of eg. 

This infinitive is used when the action spoken 
of in the dependent sentence is future in reference 
to the action expressed by the principal verb. 



We expect that this interpreter will come at 
daybreak. Near was the stage where Cyrus 
was going to stop. Cyrus and the horsemen 
remained two days in the villages, whence they 
were about to come to the sea. The merchant 
explained that the soldiers would be ready to 
make war. Ariaeus swears that he will be an 
ally. I expect that the interpreter will not seek 
these things speedily, but will delay. The scouts 
said that the guides would lead us (to a place) 
whence we should have provisions. I suspect 
that Cyrus himself will make an expedition 
against the king. We said that the horsemen 
would conquer the interpreters. I think that they 
will join battle with one another. The artist 
thinks that the strangers will behold many won- 
derful things. He thought to command the whole 
country. He said he would not let his farm. The 
prisoner hears that the creditor will demand all 
his property. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 11 

III. SECOND AORIST. 

The suffix is uv added to the Crude Form. 

Examples. 
Aaj3, Xaj3-£iy, to take; iiaQ, jxad-uv. 

The aorist infinitive is not used when the action 
spoken of in the dependent sentence is going on 
at the same time as that expressed by the prin- 
cipal verb, but when the action itself, not its im- 
mediate performance, is spoken of. (Vide Re- 
marks on aorist imperative.) As the English 
language has no forms for the aorist, the same 
word must sometimes be translated by the im- 
perfect infinitive and sometimes by the aorist, 
according to the meaning. 



The generals ordered us to flee to the emi- 
nences. The commanders wish to leave the tent. 
The interpreters reported that the deserters pelted 
the women with stones. The king was going to flee 
to the hill. I advise thee to enter the other vessel. 
The boys desire to learn the Greek language. It 
was possible to catch the bustards. The general 
desired to have this rank allotted him. Before 
losing (infin.) the cohort, the commander desired 
to remain in the country. I desire to instil 
eagerness into the army. The father desires to 
leave behind great treasures for his children. 
The ambassador will order thee to come hither. 
H 2 



78 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



We mean to leave guards over the soldiers. The 
slave was willing to die for the boy. 

IV. FIRST AORIST. 

The suffix is t added to the tense form. 

Examples, 
(TTEiX-a-i, \v-CFa-L, viKTi'da-i, dr}\(jj-<Ta-i. 



1. The king ordered them to send ambassadors 
to Lacedaemon concerning an alliance. The 
commanders did not wish to assemble the people. 
Xenophon heard that the herald summoned an 
assembly. These historians say that the Corin- 
thians made an expedition against the Athenians. 
It is possible for thee to save thy father. Cyrus 
turned over the country to the Greeks to plunder. 
The shepherd reported that Xenias the Arcadian, 
and Pasion the Megarian, sailed away. The 
enemies were just going to burn up the villages. 
It was resolved by (seemed fit to) the generals 
to punish the most faithless traitors. The am- 
bassadors said that the king's army conquered 
the barbarians. It seemed fit to the ambassadors 
to sacrifice to Apollo. 

2. It seemed fit to the king to distribute the 
corn to the more worthy soldiers. I was just going 
to send away the vessels to Aegina. It is possible 
for us to remain in these villages till evening. We 
did not wish to slay the messengers in the island. 
He said that the priest shewed him many hidden 



GEEEK EXERCISES. 79 

things. The messengers will be able to report 
things from the king to the Greeks, and things 
from the Greeks to the king. It was not possi- 
ble to give the signal with the horn. There was 
a report that the judge limited the time of the trial. 

V. PERFECT. 

The sufBx is evai added to the tense form, of 
which the final a is dropped. 

Examples. 
Avf \e-Xv-K-evai, to have loosened; rvrr, re-Tvcp- 
svai ; Kpajf Ke-Kpay-Evai ; vtKa, v£-vLKr)-K-evaL ; 
driXoj dt-or]X(jj-K-£vai, 
Vide Remarks on the Perfect Indicative. 



I hear that Xenias the Arcadian, and Pasion 
the Megarian, have sailed away. The woman 
hears that the others are dead. The ambassadors 
report that Cyrus is dead. I find that the boys 
themselves have written the letters. We find that 
the king has enriched the ambassador. There 
was a true report that the soldiers had entered 
the villages in the country of the Carduchians. 
The impudent citizens consider that the king has 
violated his oaths. This priest said that the 
cowardly soldiers had fled to the hill. I con- 
jecture that the king has sent the same ambas- 
sadors to Corinth. The farmer says that he has 
sold his more fertile farm. The stranger reported 



80 GREEK EXERCISES. 

that the very rich merchant had let all his 
houses. Cyrus heard that the slaves had got 
away. Xenophon heard that the deserters had 
conquered. 



XXV. — Participles. 

Remark 1. There are four active participles; 
the imperfect, the perfect, the future, and the 
aorist (1st and 2nd). 

Remark 2. The participles are declined like 
adjectives, and, like them, agree with the sub- 
stantives to which they refer, in gender, number, 
and case. 

Remark 3. The participles are much more 
frequently used in Greek than in English ; there 
are many Verbs which are always followed by 
a participle instead of the infinitive ; and rela- 
tive clauses in English are often expressed by 
participles in Greek. This is the case with all 
the relative clauses in the following exercises. 

I. IMPERFECT. 

Remark. The imperfect participle is made 
by adding ovr to the Crude Form, or the In- 
creased Form in verbs which have one. The 
word is then declined as a noun of the consonant 
declension in the inasc. and neut., the final r 
being dropped in the nom. sing., and in the 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



8i 



masc. the o being lengthened.^ In the fern, the 
syllable aa is added, and ovraa is softened into 
ovoa, which is then declined like OaXaaaa* 









Example. 






C.F. 


\v. 


Imperf. Part. 


\v-ovT loosening. 


M. 


F. 


N. 




M. 


F. . N. 


)-(i}V 


-ov<Ta 


-ov. 


N. 


\v'Ovr(.Q 


-ovaai 'Ovra, 


-U)V 


-ovcra 


-ov. 


V. 


-ovreg 


-ov<Jcu -ovTa. 


-ovTog 


-ovcrrjs 


-OVTOQ. 


. G. 


-OVTWV 


-OVCTijJV -OVTOJV. 


-OVTl 


-ovcry 


-OVTl. 


D. 


-ovai 


-ovaaig -ovci. 


-ovra 


-ovaav 


-OV. 


A. 


-ovraq 


'Ovcrag -ovra. 



Similarly, ypa(l>ovr, ire/jLTrovT, (pepovr, tikovt, 
XeiTTovT, ayyeXovT, ovt, participle of eg, (only the 
termination being left.) In the contract verbs 
a-ovT becomes ujvt ; i-ovr, ovvt ; o-ovt, ovvt. 
Their participles are then declined exactly like the 
above example, the nom. sing. masc. always 
ending; in wv. 



Parysatis was the mother of the reigning Ar- 
taxerxes. Cyrus plots against the reigning Ar- 
taxerxes. Tissaphernes happened to have (say, 
having) the city. Cyrus spun out their hopes 
(by) promising. The CiHcian queen herself ad- 
mired the splendour of the army as she rode by 
(say, riding by) in her chariot. The boats sail 



* Vide Remark 2, Exercise XVII. 



82 GREEK EXERCISES. 

round, no one hindering.* Darius (while) dying, 
said these things. I hear that Clearchus is an- 
noyed at the present circumstances. Orontes was 
evidently (say, evident) conquering. Orontes, a 
man related to the king, plots against Cyrus, 
We were evidently delaying. You would wonder 
at the folly of those who demand the arms. 
Behold the man chastising the bad boy. If the 
scouts were to see the robbers hunting the deer, 
they would catch them. The physicians benefited 
the women who were ill. Let the generals put a 
stop to the soldiers laughing. Some boys never 
cease talking. These damsels will leave off prac- 
tising dancing. Cyrus was evidently wondering. 
I will come with all the commanders, the king 
being willing. There is a difficulty in remaining 
(say, to remain), the king being unwilling. I 
suspect that the accuser (say, the (person) ac- 
cusing) is Menon. With those of the women 
present I will come into the house speedily. 

II. FUTURE. 

Remark. The suffix is ovr, as in the imper- 
fect, added to the Tense Form. In the liquid 
verbs the connecting vowel £ of the Tense Form 
contracts with the o, making ov. 



* Genitive. In Latin the ablative is the case used absolutely, 
i. e. independently of other words in the sentence ; in Greek the 
genitive is the case so used. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 83 

Examples. 
\v fut. T. F. \v-(T fut. part. \v-(t-ovt (M.&N.) \v-ff-ovffa (F.) 

(TTiX „ (TTs\-€ „ (TTSX-OVVT „ OTeX-OVffa „ 

The future participle is declined exactly like 
the imperfect. 

The future participle is used to express a pur- 
pose or intention, which in English is often ex- 
pressed by the infinitive. 



The same messengers came to say these things. 
I heard that the general did these things with the 
intention* of plotting against the king. The king 
came with the intention of sending a herald to 
the Greeks. Cyrus sends another to demand the 
arms. Clearchus marched slowly, intending to 
delay five days on the road. There will be no 
one who will conquer the king. We had sent 
away the more faithful scouts to lead you back 
into Europe. There will be no one who will fur- 
nish a market to us. The commander suspected 
that the ambassador came with the intention of 
making terms with those of the opposite faction. 
I myself will send some one to explain these 
things to the king. The king sent some one to 
give the signal with the horn. The queens are 
come with the intention of remaining in the same 
tent. The women are come to clear the land. 

* * With the intention of,' &c. wg, with the participle. 



84 GREEK EXERCISES. 

The Corinthians are delaying in the country, 
with the intention of burning up the villages. 

III. SECOND AORIST. 

Remark. The second aorist participle is made 
by adding 6vt to the Crude Form. 

Ea^ample. 
C. F. XtTT, aor. part. \nr-6vT, having left. 

It is declined exactly like the imperfect. 

The aorist participles are past participles. The 
difference between them and the perfect parti- 
ciple is the same as that between the aorist and 
pres. perfect indie. Vide Remarks on those tenses. 



Having fled from the city, the mother came to 
the king. Having escaped the notice of the 
guide, the generals were hastening to the emi- 
nences. Afterwards (say, after these things), at 
Cyrus's order (say, Cyrus ordering), having taken 
Orontes by the girdle* for death, they led him 
out. Having thrown away the gold, these slaves 
ran to the deeper river. The citizens, having left 
the city, sought for the footsteps of the horses. 
Thosef out of the market-place, having left their 
wares, were assigning their shares by lot. The 
Greeks, having met the ambassadors, came in a 
fit of laughter (say, with laughter) to the tents. 

* Expressed by the genitive. f Article. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 6 1 

Examples. 



VIKCJ, 


viK(t)fiev, 


aiTiOy 


aiTOJfieVj 


SrjXuj, 


dr]\(jJiJLSv, 


VlK(fQ, 


VlKUTEy 


airyg, 


airr/Tf, 


dljXoLQj 


drjXiore, 


VlK(f, 


viKhJcn. 


airy, 


aiTixxji. 


dr]\oi, 


dt]\<jt)(n. 



This tense is used when the action is spoken of 
as unfinished^ continuing, or habitual. 



I will come that I may see what you are do- 
ing. If the soldiers remain, the queen will give 
them provisions. We are going away that we 
may dwell safely in the city. If ye have any 
thing, ye will not ask for more (plur.). The 
herald says this, in order that the clever artist 
may work without intermission. The gardener 
is at a loss what he is to do. The messenger 
is here, in order that we may examine this 
affair. The philosopher has taught the boy, in 
order that he may be more happy. The master will 
do whatever^ seems fit to him. I have sent a 
letter to you that ye may be present. Whilst 
the advocate is speaking the jurymen will be silent. 
The rear-guard will watch while the rest of the 
army is sleeping. The travellers will remain in 
the cave until the robbers are sailing away. While 



* Translate " what " by the neut plur. relative pronoun. Re- 
lative words when used with the subjunctive are generally followed 
by the particle av. Sometimes av is compounded with relative 
adverbs, as orav from ots ' when,' eiretdav from ETreidrj ' when ;* 
and these compounds can be used only with the subjunctive mood. 
6 



62 GREEK EXERCISES. 

the physicians are disputing, the old man will 
perhaps die. 

II. PRESENT PERFECT.* 

Examples, 

\t-\v-K-iiiy \e-\v-K-u)iiev, i ve-viKTf-K-u), ve-vLKtf-K-tjjvev, 



Xe-Xv-K-yg, Xe-Xv-K-tjTS, I v€-viKtj-K-yg, ve-viKjj-K-jjre, 

Xi-Xv-K-y, Xs-Xv-K-lO<Tl. ! Vf.-VlK1]-K-y, Ve-VIK1]-K-<JJ<TI. 

St-difXw-K-oj, ^e-^j]X(i)-K-(i)fieVy 

d£-CT]X0J-K-yQ, f€-^?/Xw-ic-?jr€, 

de-dijXoj-K'y, ^£-^?/Xa>-ic-to<Ti. 

As in the indicative, this tense is used in speak- 
ing of an action which has taken place in past time, 
but the results of which still exist — " in the per- 
fect the chief regard is paid to the permanence of 
the consequence of an action." 



If you have done this before I return I will 
give you much gold. If the thieves should be 
dead the slaves will bury them. When the 
young man has written this letter, he will hasten 
away from the city. The physicians will remain 
until they have purified the city. The gardener 
will work until he has planted the trees in the 
garden. These very foolish sailors will not 
escape unpunished, if they have injured the state. 
Unless he has carved the statue, the artist will 
not come to-morrow. The masters will not shut 

* This tense is often made of the perfect participle with the 
subjunctive of the verb eg ; as T€Tv<pojg w. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 63 

the book before they have explained the discourse 
to the pupils. 



II. AORISTS (i.e. INDEFINITE PRESENTS). 


Ea^amples. 


2nd Aorist. 1st Aorist. 


\a(S-(t), Xa(3-(i}iitVf 


j3Xaip-u), ^\a\p-u)fievj 


\aj3-ygj Xa/S-j^re, 


(SXarp-yg^ (3Xa\p-TjTS, 


Xa/3-y, Xa^-ioai. 


jSXail^-y, ^Xa-^-(o(Ti. 


1st Aorist. 


aiTTi-ff-b) aiTTi-cr-ijjfieVj 


aiTii'<T-yg, airrj-ff-rjTS, 


aiTt]-(T-y^ 


aiTrj-ff-aKTi. 



The aorist is used in speaking of an action 
regarded as momentary and complete. The aor. 
subj. is frequently equivalent to the Latin present 
perfect subj. It is also used instead of the impe- 
rative in prohibitions, when the act regarded as 
future is wholly forbidden, and in doubting 
questions, in the 1st person. 



If Ariaeus come hither, we will place him upon 
the kingly throne. We will tell in Greece what- 
ever (plur.) you may advise. When the-signal-is- 
given the scouts will do so. Whither shall I flee- 
from this wild boar? If the travellers send away 
the rowers, they will not return until night. Do 
not talk much (i. e. many things), oh boys ! The 
queen herself has called together the generals that 
they may advise her. The robber will not kill the 



64 GREEK EXERCISES. 

man, lest the judge should punish him. I make 
that inquiry, in order that the old man may not re- 
main here. Shall we approach the house ? The 
islanders will certainly wage war against the 
Phrygians if they burn down their villages. The 
soldiers are running as fast as possible* in order 
that they may catch the deserters. The hus- 
bandmen will be here that the boys may learn 
agriculture. Do not come while I am here. 
The heralds will remain until the exiles leave the 
country. 



XXII. — Tenses of the Optative. 

Remark 1. There are four tenses in this 
mood. The past imperfect, the past perfect 
(these are usually called the present and perfect), 
the past indefinite (or aorist 1st and 2nd), and 
the future. 

Remark 2. The tense forms of the Optative 
are the same as those of the indicative, except 
that they have no augment. 

Remark 3. The characteristic of the Opta- 
tive tenses is the diphthong oi, except in the 1st 
aorist, which has only the vowel i, coalescing 
with the a of the Tense Form into the diphthong 



* Such expressions as this are to be translated by the super- 
lative with the particles wg, on, or ottw^. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



65 



Remark 4. The personal endings are the fol- 
lowing. 



1. 2. 3. 
Sing. fuLi, g, None 



1. 2. 3. 
Plur. fievf r£, sv. 

Remark 5. The optative is used when the 
principal verb is a past tense, and in some kinds 
of hypothetical sentences. 





I. 


PAST IMPERFECT. 

Ea^amples. 


ay-oi-fxi, 


ay-oi-ju6v, 


ti-TjVj si-Tjfi(v,'\ of 6e, * be,' conjugated 


ay-oi-Sy 


ay-oi-re, 


ei-T]Qy ti-T/re, V in a manner diiferent 


ay-oi, 


ay-oi-ev. 


Ei-r], ei-r)(Tav,j from the active verb. 



CONTRACT VERBS. 

1 . a combines with oi to form c^. 



2. £ 


Jf 


» < 


01. 




3. 


Jf 


Examples* 


01. 




vtjcy/ti, 


VlKl^fiSVj 


aiToifiiy aiTOLfiev, 


dijXoLfxi, 


driXoifxev, 


vi/cye, 


vi/c<^re, 


aLTOlQ, aiTOlTt, 


dT]\oig, 


St]\olt(:, 


VlK</>, 


VlKi^lV. 


aLTOi, aiTouv. 


di]\oi, 


dr}\ouv. 



This tense is used when the action is spoken 
of as unfinished, continuing, or habitual. 



The messengers said that Ariaeus was waiting 
for the Greeks. We heard from the deserter 

* In these verbs, the Attic dialect generally has the following 
terminations in the singular, instead of those here given : tjv, 
nQy V' 

G 2 



66 GREEK EXERCISES. 

that ye were conquering those opposed to you. 
The soldiers were afraid that* the enemy were 
leading the bowmen against the left wing. The 
thieves were wondering that the master did not 
call the servant. The same scout went to the city 
that he might remain there with the merchant. 
We were in the tower in order that we might 
observe the army. The workmen had inquired 
what else they were to do. The very impudent 
boys said that they hoped for many good things 
from the traveller. The physicians themselves 
considered that the mother of the child was very 
ill. You conjectured that the swifter vessels 
were sailing away beyond the harbour. If the 
Thracians were to wage war, they would greatly 
injure the Athenians.^ The heavy-armed men 
used to guard while the right wing was sleeping. 
The judge himself said that he was waitmg while 
they cut down the bridge. If you were to behold 
Athens, you would greatly admire the beauty of 
that city. 

* When the principal sentence implies fear, solicitude, or 
uncertainty, iiri is used instead of on to connect the dependent 
sentence. 

•f" In this and other sentences of the same kind the particle av 
must be used with the verb in the second or consequent clause. 
Its use is to shew that the sentence relates to something merely 
supposed, not to what has actually happened. Its position is 
either immediately before or immediately after the verb. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 67 



II. PAST PERFECT. 


Examples.* 


re-rax-oi-ni, re-Tax-oi-fxev, 


yTr]'K-oi-fii, yTr]-K-oi-fiev, 


re-Tax-oi-g, Tt-rax-oi-re, 


yTTj-K-oi-g, yrrj-K-oi-TS, 


TE-rax-oi, Te-rax-oi-ev. 


7jTr]-K-0L, yTr]-K-oi-ev.f 


Vide Remark on the Perfect Conjunctive. 



The boy said that he had written the letter. 
The generals of the Greeks themselves heard that 
Cyrus vv^as dead. The citizens said that the 
robber had murdered the shepherd. The cap- 
tain inquired whether the soldiers had done all 
the work. The scouts reported that you had 
dug the longer ditch. This teacher used to talk 
until he had fully explained the rule. The father 
said that the physicians had cured his son. The 
queen was inquiring whether the husbandmen 
had planted the palm-trees upon the mountains. 
The master suspected that the servant had not 
collected all the goats. 

III. AORISTS. 

Ea^amples. 
2nd Aorist. 1st Aorist. 



Xaf^-oi-fxi, Xa(3-oi-[iev, 
\a/3-oi-c, Xaj3-oi-re, 

Xaj3-oi, \a(3-oi-ev. 



TTSfitpa-i-fii, Treix'^a-i-fiev, 
TTifi-'^a-ij 7rsfi'<pa-i-£v. 



* The terminations of the singular are also rjv, rjg, r}. 

t Although the forms here set down do occur in the Greek 
writers, yet the perfect optative is usually expressed by the per- 
fect participle and the optative of eg. 



68 GREEK EXERCISES. 









1st Aorist. 






Troir}-(Ta- 


■i-fii, 


, TTOITJ- 


aa-i-fitVy 


TTOirj-aa- 


•'-e> 


TTOLT]- 


■aa- 


•I.T6, 


TTOlt)- 


■(Ta- 


h 


TTOll)- 


■(xa- 


■i-ev. 



In the 1st aorist the forms more commonly 
used for the 2nd and 3rd person sing, and the 3rd 
person plur. end in eiag, ete, nav ; as, woir)(T£tagj 
Troir}(T£is, TTOiriaeiav. These forms are sometimes 
called the Aeolic aorist. 

Vide Remark on Subjunctive Aorist. 



One of the attendants summoned him, in order 
that he might see the sacrifices. The eldest of 
the Greeks said that they would sooner die than 
be slaves. We had sent away the messengers 
in order that they might seek for the strangers. 
If you should hear the lion, you would hasten 
into the house. The traitor said that we concealed 
him in the upper-chamber. I came that I might 
hinder the march as much as possible. The 
farmer brought the same birds into the market- 
place that the shopkeepers might buy them. If 
the army were to remain until to-morrow it would 
receive the month's pay. If the barbarians should 
conquer us, they would certainly kill even the 
women and children. The rich man wondered 
that the base flatterer praised his horses. These 
very industrious colonists would soon clear the 
land. If the huntsmen were to destroy all the 
foxes, they would greatly benefit this country. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 69 

The steward had hired the woodmen that they 
might cut down the lofty trees which were near 
the house. If the ships were to sail away we 
should never see them again. 






ra^-oi, Ta^-oi-ev. 

aiTij-(T-oi-fii, aLTTi-ff-oi-fieVj 

aiTT]-(T-oi-g, aiTT]-(r-oi-re, 

aiTr]-(T-oi, aiTT}-(T-oi-ev. 



IV. FUTURE. 

Examples. 

fxev-oX-fjii, fxev-oT-jxev, 
jl(.V-0l-Q, fiev-ol-TE, 

fiev-oX, fi£V'0T-£v. 



e<T-oi-o, la-oi-aQe, > , 

ta-Ol-TO. t<J-Ol-VTO. J 



The fut. opt. of verbs ending in X, ju, v, p, and 
not having an increased form, is the same in form 
as the imperfect opt., except that, as shewn above, 
it has the circumflex accent, which arises from 
the £, originally used as the connecting vowel, 
coalescing with the diphthong of the termination. 
(Vide Remark 2, Exerc. XV.)^ 

The fut. opt. is used only when a sentence con- 
taining the future is reported, and made subordi- 
nate to a verb in a past tense, which is called the 
ohliqua oratioy or indirect form of expression. 



We asked him whether he would do this. The 



* In the Attic dialect the fut. opt. of these verbs has the same 
terminations in the singular as the past imperf. opt. of contract 
verbs. (Vide note on that tense.) 



70 GREEK EXERCISES. 

workman did not signify what he would require. 
The judge suspected that the jurymen would not 
remain in the tent. The Greeks were wondering 
whether ye would come. The scouts reported that 
the general would lead his own army into winter 
quarters. The crowd of women heard that the 
queen's chariot would not be safe. The Corin- 
thians suspected that ye would not wage war. 
Did the traitor say that I would send away my 
most useful servant, and leave him alone in the 
house? The deserters reported that we would 
advise them. The cowardly trumpeter said that 
he would kill the wolf. 



XXIII. — Imperative Mood. 

Remark 1. There are three tenses in this 
mood ; the imperfect, the perfect, and the aorist. 

Remark 2. The Tense Forms of the impera- 
tive are the same as those of the indicative, ex- 
cept that they have no augment. 

Remark 3. There is no form for the 1st per- 
son, either singular or plural, in the imperative. 

Remark 4. The personal endings were origi- 
nally — 

2. 3. I 2. 3. 

Sing. e-9i, s-T(t) I Plur. c-re, o-vtojv, or e-ruxrav. 

But in the ordinary active verbs the ending of 
the 2nd sing, is dropped ; and in the 1st aor. 
the termination ov is substituted for a-Oi. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 71 

Remark 5, In the active voice the perfect 
imperative is found of those verbs only in w^hich 
the present perfect is used with the signification 
of a present imperfect ; and as these verbs are 
few in number, no exercise upon that tense will 
be given. It may be stated, however, that it re- 
tains the original ending of the 2nd person sin- 
gular. 





I. IMPERFECT. 




Examples. 


(TTtW-f-rw, 


OTcXX-c-re/ 
aTe\X-o-vT(t)Vj or 
(TTtW-s-Toxrav. 


io-9iy e(T-rs, "j 

£<r-rw, eff-TtaaaVf J' of eg, be. 




CONTRACT VERBS. 


viKa, 


VlKa-T£, 


airei, airei-rs, 


VlKa-TO), 


viK(t)-vT(t)v, or 


atr£t-rw, atrov-vTiov, or 




viKu-Tuxrav. 


aiTsi-Tojffav. 


drjXov 


, drjXot 


-T 


-> 

rwv, or driXov-Tb)(Tav. 



The distinction between the present imperfect 
and the aorist imperative cannot be expressed 
by mere translation into English, as we have only 
one form for the imperative ; nor is it always easy 
to shew wherein it consists. Generally, how- 
ever, the present is used in commanding when 
emphasis is laid on the progress of the action, or 
when its continued performance is enjoined ; and 
in prohibitions, when an actually present or ha- 
bitual action is forbidden. 



72 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Do not talk so fast, children. Send away the 
scouts to the sea-shore every day. Let the gar- 
dener cut down as many cherry-trees as possible. 
Report these things from us to the king, oh 
messengers. Let them do whatsoever seems 
fit to them. Depart, for here thou art no 
longer safe. Let him insult us, we care not 
for his words. Explain these things to me 
more plainly. Do not wrong the unfortunate 
man thus. Oh children, leave the house of the 
most faithless man. Let the herald ask the Greeks 
for their arms. Save the provisions, oh foolish 
(people). Retire thou within the tower, young 
man. Farewell, plans of the wise ! Flee ! flee, 
Medea, from this dangerous land. Tell me how 
they advised you. Unfasten the bolts, atten- 
dants. Let the citizen himself say whether he 
hopes for any thing. 





II. AOR 


ISTS. 






Examples. 




Xa/3-£, 


\af3-e-Ts, 


7refi\p-ov, 


7rf/zi|/-a-r£, 


\a/3-£-rw, 


XajS-o-vTiov, 


TTi^-^-a-TW, 


Trefi\p-a-vT(A)Vf or 




or \a(3-e-T(jj(Tav. 




7re^ip-a-T(i)(Tav. 


aiTTj-a-oVj 


aiT-q-aa-TEj 


(TTeiX-ov, 


(jTiCK-a-re, 


aiTri-aa-Tojy 


aiTr]-(Ta-vT(i)v, or 


(Trei\-a-T(x), 


(TTeiX-a-vT(i)v,or 




aiTTj-aa-Tuxrav. 




oTfiX-a-rtixrav. 



The aorist imperative is used when the per-' 
formance of the action, not its time, is the point 
on which emphasis is laid. Hence it is not 
employed in commanding the continuance of an 



GREEK EXERCISES. 85 

The Cilician woman, having seen the splendour 
and discipline of the array, wondered. Cyrus 
ordered Aristippus, having led back^ these men, 
to come to the city. Xenias, having killed those 
from (say, out of) the cities, came to Sardis. 
Cyrus ordered the youngest damsel to come and 
say this.f The generals order the ladies to come 
and see these things. f Having learnt the pro- 
ceedingsj there, the commanders rode away. 
Having come to the market-place, the soldiers 
bought the provisions. 

IV. FIRST AORIST. 

Remark. This participle is made by adding 
VT to the Tense Form. Hence the aorist parti- 
ciple of \v is \v-(Ta'VT, and of areX, aTsiX-a-vT. 

The VT are dropped and the a lengthened 
before the suffix o- in the sing. nom. masc, 
and before the suffix (ra of the feminine. In 
the neut. nom. sing, (no case-ending being 
added in the neut.) the r is dropped, and the 
a is short. In the dat. plur. masc. and neut. the 
VT are dropped before the suffix m. 



* ** Having led back " may either agree with Aristippus in the 
dative, or it may be in the accusative, as is common before a 
verb in the infinitive. 

t In these sentences the former infinitive must be translated by 
the participle, and the conjunction will consequently be omitted. 

X Art. neut. plur. 

I 



86 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Example. 

C. F. \v. Aor. Part. Xv-aa-vr, having loosened. 

M. F. N. M. F. N. 

Xv-crdc -adaa -crav N. Xv-cavTsg -(racrai -aavra. 

-(Tag -(Ta(Ta -aav V. 'travTsg -aaaat -travTa. 

-aavTog -craerig -aavrog G. -aavTiov -(raaojv -aavTMv. 

-aavTi -(xaa-g -aavTi D. -caai -traaaig -(xaai. 

-aavTa -aaaav -crav A. -aavrag -(racrag -aavra. 

Similarly, '7rEfM\pavTy jpaipavTf vofiiaavT, juLsivavT, 
VEifiavT, ayjEiXavTy viKricravr, airriaravT. 

The adjective Travr ' all/ is declined in the same 
way as this participle. 



On hearing (having heard) these things, the 
chosen (men) report to the soldiers. The chosen 
men reported all the things which seemed fit* to 
the army. Having collected an army, Cyrus 
made war on the Thracians. Having thrown 
away the tunics, they ran into the tent. The 
brothers of the women who had remained expected 
great (much) good fortune. Having incurred 
danger in the village, the women went away. 
The friends of those who had pursued were soon 
tired. Having persuaded me, you received pledges 
from me. Having done these things, all the 
youths went away. Having remained five days 
in the country, the sisters sold the farm. Having 
distributed the rest of the corn to the soldiers, 

* Neut. art. with participle. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 87 

the general rode away as quickly as possible. 
The youth came with those who had killed the 
messenger. To the soldiers when they have con- 
quered I will give many rewards. 

V. PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 

Remark. This participle is made from the 
tense form of the perfect after dropping the final 
«, by adding or for the masculine and neuter, 
and via for the feminine. 

The r of the masculine and neuter Crude Form 
becomes g in the nominative singular, because r 
cannot stand at the end of a word. In the mas- 
culine nominative the o becomes w. 

The r in the dative plural is lost before o-, as 
usual. . - 

The feminine is declined regularly like nouns 
in a. 

Example. 

C. F. Xu. Perf. Part. \e-\vKOT, having loosened. 

M. F. ' N. -■ -'^. M. F. N. 

\£-\vK-(t}g -via -og. - N. . Xe-XvK-Greg -viai -ora. 

-(og -via -og. "V". -oreg -viai -ora. , 

-orog -viag -OTogi G.'- -ot(jjv -viojv -otujv. 

-oTi -via -on.. ' .D,. -ocri -viaig -oai. 

-ora -viav -og. . J^. ., -orag -viag -ora. 

Similarly, /3f]3ovX€VKGT, yey^oa^or, 7r£7ro/^^or, 
TTETrrwKor, veviKrjKor, rjfnKOTf TrecjiiXrjicoT, 



I, hear that Cyrus, is dead. The Egyptians 



88 GREEK EXERCISES. 

used to embalm the dead.''*' The guides sent those 
who had fled out of the city into the plain. 
Those who had conquered came into the tents 
with the women and the children. Cyrus will 
restore those who have been expelled. We hear 
that the general has fallen. The strangers are 
aware that the father has taught the youth these 
things. The shepherds rejoiced that the Thracians 
had punishedf the robbers. Xenpphon heard 
that the messengers had sailed away. The stew- 
ard brought in the boy who had written the let- 
ters. (It) is disgraceful for him not to entertain 
you, who have done these things. It is disgrace- 
ful for thee, who hast ordered these things, to 
speak thus. Ye heard that the sister was dead. 
I am conscious of having wronged you. 



PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. 

General Memarks, 

Remark 1. In most of the tenses the same 
forms serve both for the passive and the middle 
voice ; the only exceptions being the aorists and 
the future. Each voice has an aorist peculiar to 
itself ; and the passive has two futures which do 
not belong to the middle ; but what is usually 

* Perf. part. f Use 6ti with perf. part, and riaav. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 89 

called the middle future has sometimes the signi- 
fication of the passive. Where the same forms 
belong to both voices, they will be taken toge- 
ther in the following exercises. 

Remark 2. The verb is said to be in the 
middle voice when it expresses — 1st, an action 
done by the agent upon himself; 2nd, an action 
done by the agent for his own benefit ; or 3rd, 
an action which the agent procures to be done 
for his own benefit. Many verbs, however, are 
found in the middle form only, having neither 
the active nor the passive voice ; and some of 
these have the ordinary transitive meaning, but 
most of them are intransitive ; they are, in fact, 
of the same kind as the deponent verbs in Latin. 
Another class of these deponent verbs have their 
aorists of the passive form ; and transitive de- 
ponents very commonly have tenses which are 
passive both in form and signification. 

Remark 3. The direct reflective meaning (1st 
in Rem. 2) is found in very few verbs ; the middle 
forms more frequently having a transitive or in- 
transitive signification, equivalent to a new simple 
meaning. 

Remark 4. The rules already given respect- 
ing the contraction of vowels, the changes of con- 
sonants, the augments, &c., and the remarks on 
the use of the tenses and moods, apply, of course, 
to all the voices, and consequently will not be re- 
peated. 

I 2 



90 GREEK EXERCISES. 

TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 



XXVI. — Present. 

Remark. This tense is made by adding the 
following terminations to the Crude Form, or, 
where there is one, to the Increased Form. 
o-iuLai 1. o-/xeOa, 

(a-<Tai, saij) rj or €i* 2. z-aOe. 

e-Tai 3. o-vTai, 

Examples, 

C.F. \v. 

\v-o-fiai I am being loosened, Xv-o-fxsQaWe are being 

loosened, 
\v-{e-<Tai, tai,) y Thou art being Xv-t-oQe Ye are being 

loosened. loosened. 

\v-i-Tai He is being loosened, Xv-o-vrai They are being 

loosened. 



C.F. rVTT. I.F. TVTTT. 

TVTTT-o-fiai, TVTrr-o-fieOay 

ri»7rr-(e-(rai,£ai,)y, TVTTT-e-irOe, 



rvTTT-e-Tai, 



TVTTT-OV-Tai. 



C.F. VIKU. 

j/iK(a-6<Tai,a£ai)^, viKa-aOsy 
viKa-rai, viKOJ-vTai. 



C.F. (piXe love. 
(piXov-fjiai, (piKov-fieOaj 

0i\(£-£(Tai, eeat)ei, 0i\ei-(T0£, 
(piXsL-Tai, (piXoV'VTai, 



C.F. fiiffOo hire. 
fiiaOov-fiai, fiKrOov-fieOaf 

fiL<T9{o-£(Tai,oeai)oif yuaOov-oBij 
[iL<r9ov-Tai, fiiffOov-vrai. 



* El was only the colloquial Attic form, which, however, was 
always used with the verbs (SovX ' wish,' oi ' think,' and in the 
future of OTT 'see.' Many modern editors have introduced it 
into the tragedians, but the MSS. do not warrant this innovation. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 91 



I. PASSIVE, 

I am being sent by the king himself. Thou art 
being hired by Cyrus. The guide is being sent by 
the general to Laurion in Attica. We are being 
led to death. Ye are being sought for. The ox is 
being sacrificed on the eminences. It is said 
that the generals have done all these things 
in the plain. It is said that Cyrus made an 
expedition against Artaxerxes. It is said that 
the enemies will come at daybreak. The boys 
are being brought up at the court of Croesus. 
Ye are being turned to flight by the enemies. 
The letters are being brought into the tent. 
These men are said to be among the best of the 
Greeks. The arms are demanded from the pri- 
soners. I am being struck by the soldier. Thou 
art being conquered by the messenger. Ye are 
being left by us. The dead are being buried in 
the plain. As many Greeks as possible are being 
drawn up for battle. It is conjectured that about 
three thousand heavy-armed joined in the expe- 
dition with him. It is conjectured to be the track 
of about two thousand camels. The soldiers are 
assembling into the plain of Castolus. The foxes are 
being hunted. The idle boys are being punished. 
The beautiful country is being made bare of trees. 
We are conquered by the satrap. The generals 
are enraged on account of the loss of the soldiers. 
I am enraged with thee. The general is wounded 



92 GREEK EXERCISES. 

in the thigh. An innumerable army is collecting 
by Xerxes. The city is taking. The soldiers are 
praised for their courage. 

II. MIDDLE. 

Cyrus marches through Phrygia. We are 
going before into Cilicia. I wish to do all these 
things. Not all judges consult without anger. 
You wish to fare well. The young men fight 
boldly for their country. The Lacedaemonians 
march to the sound of (say, with) flutes. This 
shopkeeper tells a lie. The citizens obey the 
laws. The skilful physicians heal the severe 
wounds. We choose peace in preference to war. 
The king hires the impudent barber's son. Ye 
arrive at the first stage about midnight.* The 
traitors are rushing forward as eagerly as pos- 
sible. Having heard these things, the king makes 
counter-preparations. Cyrus is consulting with 
Clearchus (dat.). The king begins the war. Cyrus 
sends for the herald and the interpreter. Good 
citizens follow the laws. The soldiers pack up 
their baggage. 

XXVII. — Future Imperfect. 

Remark. This tense is made by adding a to 
the Crude Form, and affixing the same endings 
as in the present. 

* Plural. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



93 



The future imperfect is generally called the 
Middle Future ; but it is often used in the Attic 
dialect in the passive signification. 

Examples. 
C.F. 0i; 'sacrifice,' Pass. Fut. T.F. eva. 



Ov-ff-o-fxai 

9v-(X-{e-(Tai,e-aL) 

Ov-a-i-rai 

Qv-a-o-fxiQa 

9v-(T-e-cr9e 

Qv-a-o-vrai 



I shall be sacrificed, 
Thou wilt be sacrificed, 
He wiU be sacrificed, 

"We shall be sacrificed, 
Ye will be sacrificed, 
They wiU be sacrificed. 



C.F. /SouXtu * deliberate,' Mid. Fut. T.F. BovXev-cr. 

Pov\ev-<T-o-fiai I shall deUberate, 

/3ov\€v-(r(c-(rai, fat), y Thou wilt deliberate, 
jSovXeu-ff-c-rat He will deUberate, 

(3ov\ev-ff-o-fi€9a We shall deliberate, 



(3ov\ev-(r-e-(T96 
fiov\ev-(r-o-vTai 



Ye will deliberate, 
They wiU deliberate. 



I. PASSIVE. 

The oxen will be sacrificed by the priest on 
the eminences. The boys will be brought up 
at the court of the king. It will be said that 
the king is cruel. We shall be ensnared by 
the enemies. Ye will be freed from fear and 
anxiety. I shall be honoured by the rulers of 
the state. The women will be benefited by the 
labours of their children. The Athenians will be 
thrown into confusion by one another. 



94 GREEK EXERCISES. 

11. MIDDLE. 

We shall lead this army. The judges will con- 
sult without anger. The youths will fight boldly 
for their country. Having heard these things, 
the king will hire a large army. We shall 
follow with Cyrus, no one hindering (gen. abs.). 
Thou wilt encamp near the bridge. The soldiers 
will pack up their baggage. The islanders will 
turn to piracy. Ye will cease running. Ye will 
choose honour and liberty. Thou shalt taste of 
honours. Before the work I shall deliberate 
welL The good citizens will cheerfully obey the 
laws. The horsemen will not perceive the plot 
against them (say, the against them plot). I will 
send for the satrap from his government. The 
Lacedaemonians will march to the sound of 
flutes. 



XXVIII. — Future Indefinite Passive. 

Remark 1. This tense is made in two ways, 
which are commonly distinguished as 1st and 2nd. 

1st, By adding Orjcr to the Crude Form : the 
future of contract verbs is made in this way, 
the vowel being lengthened as in the fut. act. 
When this suffix is added to a verb endings 
in an unaspirated labial or guttural, the final 
consonant is changed into the corresponding 
aspirate : thus tt or /3 becomes ; 7 or k be- 
comes x'j ^j "^f ^^^ ^j before d become a. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 95 

2nd, By adding »](r to the Crude Form. 

In both futures the person-endings are the same 
as in the present tense. 

The suffixes of these futures evidently connect 
them with the passive aorists (vide Exerc. xxx.) ; 
and in signification also they are analogous to 
the aorist ; for which reason they are here called 
"indefinite." 

Some verbs have both the 1st and the 2nd 
future, but most verbs have only one of them. 

Remark 2. The 1st fut. is made from the 
Long Form, if there is one (vide p. 24) ; the 2nd 
fut. from the short one : e. g. Xiw, Long Form 
XaTr; 1st fut. X£t^-0»jo- ; EK-TrXay, Long Form ek- 
irX-qjf 2nd fut. EK-TrXay-rjo". 

Remark 3. The Crude Form is subject to the 
following changes in the futures. 

1. £ in monosyllabic roots ending in a liquid is 
changed into a: e.g. tev, 1st fut. ra-^rjo-: oreX, 
2nd fut. (TToX-TjCT, (vide p. 54). 

2. £ preceded by p is changed into a in the 2nd 
fut. : e. g. TpETTj Tpa7r-r}cr ; arpEtp, (Trpa<p-r](T. 

3. (T is frequently inserted before the suffix of 
the 1st fut. ; chiefly when the Crude Forms end in 
the diphthongs av, £u, or ov : e. g. Qpav, Opav-a- 
-Or](T j keXev, KsXev-a-6r}(y ; aKOv, aKOV-(T'0r]<T, 

Example. 
C. F. XtTT leave. Fut. T. F. \H(l>-Or](y. 
\H<p-9r](T-oiiai I shall be left, 

XtL(}>-Or](x-(£-(Tai, e-ai) y Thou wilt be left, 

\eif-9ri(T-e-Tai He will be left, 



96 GREEK EXERCISES. 

\H<l>.er)<T.o-fie9a We shaU be left, 

X£i^.07j(T.£-(T0f Ye will be left, 

\ei(p.eri(r-o-vTai They will be left. 

Similarly, C. F. Xitt, Fut. T. F. XiTr-ncr: C.F. 
rpsir, Fut. T. F. r/oaTT-Tjor. 

Remark 4. The word avep 'a man/ has a 
peculiarity in its declension, owing to the elision 
of the short vowel e. For example, avepog be- 
comes av>oc, and the thin dental (S) is inserted 
for euphony. Hence avepog, &c. 

avnp. N. {avepeg, avpeg,) avdptg. 

avep. V. {avtpsg, avpeg,) avdpeg. 

{avepog, av'pog,) avepog. G. {avepiov, avpujv,) avSpcov. 

(avepi, av'pi,) avSpu D. (avepm, av'pam,) avdpam. 

(avepa, av'pa,) avdpa. A. (avepag, avpag,) avdpag. 

Note. The same change of the vowel in the 
dative plural occurs in irarep 'father,' dative 
plural irarpa-cTi ; in fivrep ' mother,' dative plural 
fivrpa-m; and in Ovyarsp 'daughter,' dative 
plural Ovyarpa-m. These three nouns also throw 
away e in the genitive and dative singular. 



1. The soldiers will be left in the plain with 
the sailors. We shall be left by the generals and 
captains. The horses will be led into the same 
plain. The partridges will be pursued by the 
horses. I shall be compelled by them to do these 
things. After this (pi.) thou wilt be compelled to ^ 
come. These things will be made evident by what ' 
(pi.) I shall do on the next day. We shall be pre- 



GREEK EXERCISES. 97 

vented from coming^ into the camp. The tracks of 
the camels will be sought for by us. The free men 
will be prevented from crossing* the very broad 
river. The scouts will be deceived by the false de- 
serter. We shall not soon be persuaded to come 
to terms with those of the opposite faction. Ye 
will be chosen ambassadors to Philip. The letters 
will be sent immediately to the general. The 
fearful horses will be thrown into confusion by 
the camels and elephants. The robber will be 
punished as severely as possible. 

2, The army will be turned to flight. We shall 
be left in the plain. The king will be struck 
with astonishment. We shall be freed from fear 
and anxiety. The army of the king will be 
destroyed by the islanders. Ye will be reared in 
the same country with us (dat.). 



XXIX. — Past Imperfect. 

Remark. The past imperfect is made by pre- 
fixing the augment, as in the active, and adding 
the following terminations to the Crude Form, 
or, where there is one, to the Increased Form. 

(e-(To, £0,) ou, 2. e-frOe, 

^"^0^ 3. o-vro. 



* Use genitive of article with imperfect infinitive. 
K 



98 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Examples. 
1. C.F. \v. Imp. T.F. £-\v. 

i-\v-o-fxrjv I was being loosened, 

£-\v-{e-(To, eo,) ov Thou wast being loosened, 
e-\v-£-ro He was being loosened, 

t-\v-o-ne6a We were being loosened, 

e-Xv-s-(T0e Ye were being loosened, 

e-Xv-o-vTo They were being loosened. 

2. C.F. Tvrr. LF. tvttt. Imp. T.F. e-TviTT. 
e-rvTTT-o-firiVf e-rvTrT-o-fieOa, 

t-TVTrT-(£-ffo, eo,) ov, t-TVTTT-e-ffOe, 

e-TVTTT-t-rOj e-TVTTT-O-VTO, 

3. C.F. viKa. T.F. e-viKa. 4. C.F. atj^e praise. T.F, yva. 
e-viKio-fiTjv, £-viK(t}-[ie9a, yvov-fiTjv, yvov-fjiiOa, 

e-viK(a-e<TO, aeo,) w, i-viKa-adt, yv^e-eao, eeo,) ov, yvei-cOej 
e-VLKu-TOf e-viK(t)-vro. yvti-TO, yvov-vro. 

5. I.F. iiicQo. T.F. e-fiKrOo. 
e-fitcr9ov-iii]v, e-fiKrOov-fieOa, 

t-lxi(TO(o-e<To, oeo,) ov, t-jxiadov-<T9ey 

t-fii<T9ov-TOy e-fii<j9ov-vro. 

I. PASSIVE. 

I was deceived by the impudent flatterer. The 
general was often hired by the king. We were sent 
oftentimes up the mountain. The horses used to 
be chosen by you. The guides were compelled to 
mount their horses. The fathers were considered 
worthy of mjich honour. The dogs used to be 
admired by the Greeks. Thou wast brought up 
at the court of Croesus. The Grecian army was 
still drawing up together. Ye were being led up 
to the very steep eminences. Thou wast sent up the 



GREEK EXERCISES. 99 

mountains. Orontes, a Persian man, and related* 
to the king by birth, was said to be among the best 
of the Persians in war (afFairs.)t Provisions (say, 
the necessary things) were being procured by the 
soldiers. These preparations were being made 
by the commanders of the barbaric army, (say, 
these things were being prepared, &c.) The lion 
was being hunted on the mountain. The scents 
of the flowers were admired by the sisters. All 
the flowers of this island were sought for by the 
men. The ten goats were being sacrificed on the 
mountains on account of the march. Smoke ap- 
peared (say, was shewn) in the villages. Not 
many days were spent in the villages. All these 
things were reported about Cyrus's army by the 
deserters. Orontes was severely punished. In 
these stages were beheld the footsteps of horses 
and dogs. The Persians were being persuaded 
by some one to cross the river Tigres. The boys 
were left in the fields. Many of the arms of the 
soldiersj were carried on the chariots and beasts 
of burden. The letter was being written in- 
Egyptian. Thou wast being praised for thy cou- 
rage* The barbarians were being conquered. 

II. MIDDLE. 

The Lacedaemonians marched to the sound of 
flutes. Having heard these things, Artaxerxes 

* Pres. part. f Plur. ace. neut. of adj. 

X May be put in the dative. 



100 GREEK EXERCISES. 

was promising that he would come. The good 
citizens followed the laws. Cyrus sent for the 
interpreter and the horseman. More than two 
thousand were arriving. The kind physicians 
healed the soldier's wound. The Hellespontiac 
cities willingly (say, willing) contributed money 
to him for the maintenance of the soldiers. Thus 
the army was maintained for him in Thessalia. 
The very fierce bear attacked the boy. Cyrus and 
his brother Artaxerxes communicated together. 
The soldiers packed up their baggage and armed 
themselves. Thou didst reverence the laws. 
Having heard these things, the daughters cheer- 
fully obeyed their father. Thou foughtest 
bravely for thy country. Ye did not perceive the 
plot against the king. We perceived that these 
soldiers had passed (perf. part.) over the river, 
and were burning up (imperf. part.) the village. 



XXX. — Passive Aorists. 

Remark. The aorist passive is made from the 
Crude Form in two ways, distinguished as 1st 
and 2nd. 

1st. By adding On' Contract and derivative 
verbs have their aorists formed in this way. The 
same changes are made in the consonants which 
come before the suffix as take place before the 



GREEK EXERCISES. lOl 

suffix Ori(T of the 1st future passive. Vide page 
94. 

2ndly. By adding ??. 

In both ways the augment is prefixed, and the 
following person-endings added. 



V 


1. 


jU£V. 


C 


2. 


re. 


« 


3. 


(Tav. 



Example. 
C. F. \v. Aor. T. F. E-Xv-Or]. 
e-\v-9rj-v I was loosened, €-Xv-9r}-fiev We were loosened, 

e-Xv-Orj-g Thou wast loosened, £-Xv-9r)-Te Ye were loosened, 
e-Xv-9r) He was loosened. e-Xv-9T]-<Tav They were loos- 

ened. 

Similarly, C.F.t/oett Hurn;' Aor. T. F. e-rpair-rj. 
C. F. viKa ; Aor. T. F. e-viKYiSri. C. F. ^rtXo ; Aor. 
T. F. e-dr}Xw-9r}, 

Some verbs have aorists formed in both ways, 
but most verbs have only one of them. Verbs 
which have a 2nd aorist active very rarely have a 
2nd aorist passive. 

Remark 2. Remarks 2 and 3 on the Future 
Indefinite Passive (p. 95) apply without any 
modification to the passive aorists, the 1st aorist 
being substituted in them for the 1st future, the 
2nd aorist for the 2nd future. 

Remark 3. Those verbs which have the 1st 
future, have also the 1st aorist ; those which have 
the 2nd future, have the 2nd aorist. 
k 2 



102 GREEK EXERCISES. 

1. Thou wast praised by thy father for thy 
good disposition. The slave was left in the rob- 
bers' cave. We were shot at by some one of the 
bowmen. Ye were drawn up as if for battle in 
the plain. The generals were wounded through 
the breastplate. Cyrus was said to be the most 
fond of horses of all his equals-in-age. Cyrus 
was declared general of all, as many as were as- 
sembled to the plain of Castolus. The soldiers 
were compelled to mount their horses in the park. 
The general's property was registered in that 
village. The country was given to him as a gift 
by the king. The boys were all taught to write 
letters in- Greek. The letters were written both 
in-Egyptian and in-Persian. Thus Cyrus was 
led out to pursue the barbarians. Of those who 
crossed^ the river not one was wetted higher 
than the breasts by the river. On hearingf these 
things Cyrus was pleased. The sea-fight was 
reported to the king by those who had been ba- 
nished. J This man was considered more worthy 
to be general than the generals themselves. 
All the flowers in the garden were admired 
by the Cilician woman. The resolutions of the 
army (say, the things which seemed fit^ to the 
army) were reported to the interpreter. These 
things were sought for by the same trumpeter. 



* Art. withpres. part. f Aor. part. 

J Art. with perf. part. ^ Art. with aor. part. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 103 

This man was brought up according to the laws 
of the Persians (say, in the Persians' laws). 
Sparta was shaken by a very dreadful earth- 
quake. Many disgraceful things* were done on 
that day. 

2. The general was thus freed from fear and 
anxiety. The king's army was struck with asto- 
nishment by the camels. The general was left 
in the tent. Hystaspes was despatched with 
(say, leading) an army to Phrygia. The mes- 
senger was put to death. Not in the same coun- 
try with us were ye reared. The Grecian horse- 
men were turned to flight by the barbarians. 
All the trees in the park were cut down. A few 
of the charioteers were injured. Many of the 
commanders were injured in the eyes by the cold 
winds. 



XXXI. — First Aorist Middle. 

Remark 1. This tense is made by prefixing the 
augment, adding aa to the Crude Form, and 
affixing the same person-endings as in the past 
imperfect, but without connecting vowels. 

(Ttt-jUTjv, cra-jutaa, 

(cra-cTO, (Ta-o,) <j(jj, aa-aOE, 

tra-TOj aa-vTO. 

* Neut. plur. of adj. 



104 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Example, 

C.¥. (3ov\(v. Aor. T,F. c-j3ovX€t;-<ra. 

E-^ov\ev-(Ta-fiT]v I deliberated, 

(-(3ov\iv-c{a-(Jo, ao,) (o Thou didst deliberate, 

e-(5ov\ev-(Ta-ro He deliberated, 

£-f3ov\eV'<Ta-fie9a We deliberated, 

£-j8oyX£u-<Ta-<T0£ Ye deliberated, 

e-(Sov\tv-(ja-vTO They deliberated. 

Remark 2. The aorist in Orj is in some verbs 
used with an active signification. 



1. The Greeks drew up opposite, as-if-they-in- 
tended to lead^ towards the mountain. At-the- 
same-time all the soldiers called out. The bar- 
barians began to run. I vowed to sacrifice to the 
other gods according to (my) ability. The sol- 
diers fought boldly for their country. Thou 
didst begin to run. The generals decreed that 
this was the best. Having walked (1 aor. part.) 
from the river to the camp, he rested. There the 
Greeks rested gladly, on-seeingf a plain. The 
horsemen plotted against them. The false guides 
shared the money. Clearchus commanded the 
willing Greeks in the war against the king. The 
same exile received very valuable gifts from 
us. The farmers got possession of a very fine 
farm. The gods did not gratify the tyrants in 

* MQ with fut. part. f 2nd aor. part. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 105 

every thing. I myself began to wonder when-I- 
saw* the splendour of the army. 

2. They marched through (the country of) the 
Carduchi. The children reverenced the good 
father. I conversed with them respecting the 
war. The masters were displeased with their 
idle slaves. Ye wished to hunt the famished 
wolves. The mother was pleased with her beau- 
tiful daughter. The Greeks were ashamed to 
flee. 



XXXII. — Second Aorist Middle. 
Remark. This tense is made by prefixing the 
augment to the Crude Form, and adding the same 
terminations as in the past imperfect. The dif- 
ference between the two tenses here, as in the 
active, is, that the past imperfect is made from 
the Increased Form, and the second aorist from 
the Crude Form. 

Example. 

C. F. ytv. 2nd Aor. T. F. t-ytv. 

i-yiv-o-tinv I became, e-yev-o-fjieea We became, 

f-ytv-(e.(7o, 60,) ov Thou becamest, £.yev-e.(r9s Ye became, 

t-yev-e-To He became, e-yev-o-vro They became. 



Cyrus, when he perceived that they had passed 
over (ace. of perf. part.), was pleased (1 aor. pass.). 
These (persons) came to him to Sardis. We 



2nd aor. part. 



IQQ GREEK EXERCISES. 

perceived that Cyrus had fallen (perf. part.) The 
heralds arrived at the tent about ""dmght A 
great shouting arose in the village The ^"^.e^s 
faid-hold-of Orontes by the girdle.* The kmg 
learnt all these things from the deserters. As 
many as had (imperf.) the islands turned to 
piracy. When they were near, the heavy-armed 
Ln turned. Cyrus promised a golden wreath to 1 
each of the Greeks. The deserters followed the 
faithless guide. 

- I 

XXXIII. — Present Perfect Passive and I 
Middle; the Comparative in ION, and ' 
Superlative in ISTO. 

Remark 1. The present perfect is made from 
the Crude Form by prefixing the reduphcat.on as 
!n the active, and adding the following termma- 
tions. i 

rat 3. vrai. [ 

The terminations are the same as in the present 
and future tenses, but they are added to the. 
Crude Form without connectmg vowels and 
hence no contraction takes place m the 2n(l 
person singular. | 



* Genitive. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



107 



Examples. 
C. F. \v. T. F. Xt-Xv. 
\i-\v-nai I have been loosened, \t-\v-iif.Qa "We have been loos- 
ened, 
\(.-\v'<rai Thou hast been loos- X£-Xu-<70£ Ye have been loos- 
ened, ened, 
Xt-Xv-Tat He has beai loosened, Xe-Xv-vrat They have been loos- 
ened. 
C. F. aive. T. F. yvrj. 
yvijfiaif yvTJixeOay 
yvqaaiy yvrjtrQet 
yvijrai, yvijvrai. 

Remark 2. In consequence of the absence of 
connecting vowels in this tense, and of all the 
personal endings beginning with consonants, 
many changes take place in Crude Forms which 
end in consonants. The following is a table of 
these changes, by which it will be seen that the 
personal terminations are never altered, except 
that the o- of the 2nd person plur. is dropped. 



Consonant of C. F. 



The labials tTj (3, <p, 



The gutturals *c, y, X) 



The dentals r, ^, 0, 



Consonant of 
Termination. 



with .. 



with .. 



with 



Result of their combination. 



become 


fifi. 

;//=7r(T. 




TTT. 

i>9. 




y/i. 




KT, 

x0. 




(Tfl. 

(T (being dropped). 

ffr. 

<tO. 



108 GREEK EXERCISES. 

These changes take place in all the perfect pas- 
sive tenses, infinitives, and participles, except the 
future perfect. 

No general rules applicable to all the persons 
can be given respecting verbs ending in a liquid ; 
the following are the principal points to be at- 
tended to : 

v-ju becomes ju/i ; but av-fi generally becomes 
aa-fi : and v is often dropped in all the persons. 

In p-<79, X-aOf v-o-O, (T is struck out. 

In the other combinations the liquid generally 
remains unchanged. 

The termination of the 3rd person plural is not 
included in the above table, because when the 
Crude Form ends in a consonant that person is 
not made by inflexion, but, as in Latin with all 
the perfect passive forms, by the perfect participle 
and the verb eg. The reason of this is, that three 
consonants are not, as a general rule, allowed to 
come together in Greek ; the chief exceptions 
being where the second and third consonants are 
a mute and liquid, or where the first and second 
consonants are the nasal y and a guttural; nor 
would it do to omit either of the letters v, r, 
since the v is necessary to distinguish the plural 
from the singular, and r is the characteristic of 
the 3rd person : the same objection does not 
exist to striking out the o* in the termination of 
the 2nd person plural, because its character is 
sufficiently preserved by the 6t, 



GREEK EXERCISES. 109 

The perfect participle is made by the redupli- 
cation and the suffix ij.evo for the masc. and neut., 
and juLEva for the feminine. The same euphonic 
changes take place in the perfect participle as in 
the perfect tense. 

Ejeamples. 



C.F. TVTT. 
TS-TVfl-fiai, TS-TV[l-fliOa, 

Tt-Tv\l/aL, Te-Tv<p-9e, 
rc-rvTT-rat, re-rvfi-fitvoL cici. 



C. F. Tzpay. 
TTE-Trpay-fiai, Tre-irpay-fitOa, 
7re-7rpa'£,aij nn-Tr pax-Qt, 
ire-irpaK-Taij 7r£-7rpay-/i€vot 
eicri. 



C. F. tdid ' accustom.' 
tiBia-fiai, tiQia-fitQa, 
ei9i-(Tai, uQi-aQt, 

(.iQia-rai, uQia-^itvoi uai. 

Remark 3. The second way of forming the 
comparative and superlative of adjectives is by 
adding Tov, or ov for the comparative, and laro 
for the superlative, either to the Crude Form of 
the simple adjective, after dropping the final 
vowel, or to the root of the adjective. 

Examples. 

rjdv * sweet/ Comp. rjd-lov, Sup. rjS-iaro, 

txO-po ' inimical,' eX0-iov, exB-iaro. 

KaK-o * bad,' kuk-Iov, kuk-ioto. 

The following is a list of the principal adjectives 
which form their comparatives and superlatives in 
this way, in addition to the examples above 
given. Some of them have also comparatives in 
TCjOo, and superlatives in raro. 

L 



110 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



Positive. 


Comparative. 


Superlatii 


raxv 'quick,' 


raxiov, 




TaxiCTTO. 


aya9o * good,' 


a/den'oVf 




apiaro. 


KoXo * beautiful,' 


KaWiov, 




kuWktto 


aitrxpo 'base,' 


aiaxtov, 




aiaxi^ro. 


oXtyo 'few,' 


Heiov, 




oKiyKTTO. 


fiiya ' great,' 


fisilov, 




}llyi<7T0. 


TToXv ' many,' 


ttXsiov or 


TrXeov, 


TrXeioTo. 


eXax* ' small,' 


t\a<T<TOV, 




eKaxi-(JTo 



Of these comparatives the same forms serve for 
masculine and feminine, the nom. sing, of vi^hich 
ends in wv, the neut. in ov. In the ace. sing, and 
in the nom. ace. and voc. plur. the v is omitted, 
and then contraction takes place. 

Example. 

Plural. 

M. & F. N. 

\itiZ,{ov-ic,, oeg) ovg, fiH^{ova,oa) u), 

jJLElZoVdJV, fl£l(^OV(i)V, 

fisi^om, fxeiKocri, 

IJLEit!,{ov-aQfOaQ) ovg, nHZ,{ova,oa)oj, 
fiei'C(ov-sg, oeg)ovg, /u£i^(ova,oa)w. 



Singular. 
M. & F. N. 

N. fitll^UJV, jiu^ov, 

G. iin'Zovogj /isi^ovog, 

D. nu^ovL, fxei^ovi, 

A. ixeiZ(ovafOa) (0, fiei^ov, 
V, fiu'Cov, fitiKov. 



I. PASSIVE. 

I have been brought up at the king's gates. 
The letter has been w^ritten by the boy. We 
have been saved by thee. Ye have been shot at 
by the bowmen. The guide has been enriched 
by the Corinthians. This man has been con- 
sidered more inimical to thee than to me. This 
general has been said to be better than all the 



* The positive is obsolete, jxiKpo being used instead. 



GREEK EXERCISES. ] 1 1 

other barbarians. We have been taught to rule. 
A great abundance of the most delicious (say, 
sweetest) meats and drinks have been sold by the 
shopkeepers. There will be a great abundance 
of the more delicious scents and sights. What 
has been considered more beautiful than this? 
The animals have been given to me by the king. 
The disease has been stopped by the physician. 
To some it has been appointed to remain, to 
others (it has been appointed) to come. The ex- 
peditions of either party have ceased (say, have 
been stopped). All these things have been ac- 
complished by the commanders. Ye have been 
thrown into confusion on the mountains. All 
these things have been said correctly by thee. 
The commander has been wounded in the eye. 
Fewer flowers have been chosen by us than by 
you. The greater wild beasts have been hunted 
by the scouts. The quickest horses have been 
hired by the queen's steward. Most of the women 
(say, the most women) have been frightened. 
Not in luxury have we been reared. The trees 
have been cut down in the park. The doors have 
been shut by the servant. I have been persuaded 
by thee to flee out of Greece. The plants have 
been dried up. It has been agreed on (say, 
prepared) by us, having opened the gates to 
introduce the army. The heralds have been 
crowned. The army has been scattered. Thou 
hast been accustomed to run faster. The servant 



112 GREEK EXERCISES. 

has been admired for his kindness and faithful- 
ness. In all men has been implanted a desire 
for independence. 

II. MIDDLE. 

The soldiers have packed up their baggage, and 
are arming themselves. I have learnt all these 
things from the herald and the deserters. The 
interpreter has obliged me in this. We have 
ceased walking. Before the vi^ork you have 
deliberated well. The Greeks have made an ex- 
pedition against the Persians. The slaves have 
tasted of liberty. The war has ended. The 
Greeks have encamped near the bridge. I have 
been annoyed at your doing these things (say, 
you doing these things). Ye have cured the 
soldier's severe wounds. Thou hast got posses- 
sion of many most beautiful things. The gar- 
deners have chosen the lofty trees. We have 
been on our guard lest we should seem to be 
fleeing. 

XXXIV. — Past Perfect Passive and 
Middle. 

Remark. This tense has the same prefixes as 
in the active, namely, the reduplication and the 
augment ; and the following terminations : — 

jurjv 1. jULsOa 

(TO 2. (jOs 

TO 3. VTO. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



113 



The terminations are the same as in the imper- 
fect tense, but, as in the present perfect, they are 
added without connecting vowels, so that all the 
rules respecting the changes of consonants, &:c., 
given in the previous exercise apply to the past 
perfect also. When the Crude Form ends in a 
consonant, the 3rd pers. plur. is made by the 
perfect participle and rtaav, the past imperfect of 

Examples. 
C. F. Xv. 



e-Xs-Xv-fiTjv 

s-Xe-Xv-cro 

s-Xe-Xv-TO 


1 had been loosened, 
Thou hadst been loosened, 
He had been loosened, 


^'Xi-Xv-fieOa 

e-Xe-Xv-aOe 

e-Xe-Xv-vTo 


We had been loosened, 
Ye had been loosened, 
They had been loosened. 


C. F. TVTT. 




C.F. Trpay. 


e-rt-Tv^-firjv, e-re-rvfi-fiiOa, 
t-Tt-TVipo, e-Te-TV(()-9e, 

t-Te-TVTT-TO, TS.-TVll-Hf.VOl T]<TaVy 


e-Tre-Trpay-fiTiv, 

€-7re-7rp«4'o, 

e-7re-7rpaK-T0. 


C. F. eOid. 
ei9i(T-fir}v, HQi<T-nt9a, 

£101-0-0, £t0l-(T0£, 




e-7re-'7rpay-fit9a, 
e-Tre-7rpax-9£j 
Trt-Trpay-jxtvoi r]<jav 


£101(7-70, £l0lO--/ifVOl 


T](rav. 




I. 


PASSIVE 





I had been brought up at the king's gates. 

The youth had been wounded under the eye. We 

had been taught to do these things. The truce 

had been violated by the enemies. All these 

L 2 



114 GREEK EXERCISES. 

things had been accomplished by the king. The 
letter had been written by the youth in Egyp- 
tian. This man had been declared satrap of 
Lydia. The king's army had been turned to 
flight. The brother had been punished by the 
cruel gardener. The sisters had been wounded. 
The disease had been stopped by the ])hysician. 
This general had been said to be the most ini- 
mical to the king, of all the Greeks. Out of the 
villages had been plundered even the very* 
timber from the houses. The doors had been 
shut by the servant. Much clothing had been 
left behind in the camp. The most beautiful 
goblets had been sold by the Scythians. The 
horsemen had been shut out by the governor of 
the village. All these things had been made-evi- 
dent. The army of the Greeks had been con- 
quered and scattered. Agesilaus had been 
crowned. From the canal ditches had been cut, 
somef large, others small. The provisions had 
been burnt up. All the largest trees had been 
cut down by the men. 

II. MIDDLE. 

We had all packed up, and were arming our- 
selves. I had ceased to run. Before the march 
thou hadst deliberated well. The commander 
had chosen death rather than dishonour. We 

* In Greek the order is " very the timbers." 
f Vide note, p. 46. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 115 

had rushed forward against the left wing. Con- 
cerning the safety of the state thou hadst been 
afraid. The slaves in the islands had tasted of 
liberty. We had learnt all these things from (sic) 
the deserters. Artaxerxes having heard of the 
armament of Cyrus, made counter-preparations. 
The Greeks had encamped near the bridges. Ye 
had obliged us in these (points). In-the-time-of 
Darius he-had-made-a-truce with the deserters. 



XXXV. — Future Perfect Passive and 
Middle. 

Remark 1. The future perfect is made from 
the Crude Form by prefixing the reduplication, 
and by adding the suffix o- and the same personal 
terminations as in the future imperfect. 

Example. 
C. F. \v. Fut. Perf. T. F. Xt-Xv-a. 
Xs'Xv-ff-o-ixai, Xe-Xv-<T-o-ii(9a, 

Xa-Xv-a^e-ffai, sai,) y, Xe-Xv-(T-e-u9e, 
Xe-Xv-ff-e-Taij Xt-Xv-ff'O-vrai. 

Vide the exercise on the future active for the 
euphonic changes. 

This tense is not unfrequently made by the 
perfect passive participle, and the future tense of 

Remark 2. This tense cannot be exactly trans- 
lated by any forms of the English verb ; it is com- 
monly rendered by the words "shall have been" — 



116 GREEK EXERCISES. 

which is the nearest representative of its meaning ; 
but it differs from the EngHsh and Latin future per- 
fect in being used to denote a future action, the 
effects of which will be permanent : so that it 
bears the same relation to the other future tenses 
(which express momentary actions) as the present 
perfect does to the aorists. 



Good things will have been mingled with bad. 
I shall have been left behind by thee. The bridge 
will have been taken down (say, loosed). We shall 
have been left behind by the Greeks. The truce 
will have been broken by the Persians. The 
trees will have been cut down in the park. If we 
do these things,* Ariaeus will immediately revolt, 
so that no friend will have been left to us, but 
even those who formerly weref (so) will be ene- 
mies to us. The villages will have been burnt 
up. The doors will have been shut. The letters 
will have been written by the boys in the Persian 
language. A hundred citizens will have been 
murdered by the enemies. The constitution will 
have been completely organized. It will have 
been appointed to the older (man) to rule all the 
younger (men). The citizens will-remain-enrolled 
in the same class. 



* Genitive absolute. 

t The relative clause is to be translated by the article and par- 
ticiple. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 117 

II. MIDDLE. 

The army will have rested. I shall have ac- 
quired much property. Ye will have remembered 
the evil deeds of the cruel robber. The skilful 
physician will have healed the boy's wounds. 
The seer will have sacrificed. The soldiers will 
not have packed up their baggage before the 
march. The enemies will have encamped in the 
plain before the evening. 



XXXVI. — Tenses of the Subjunctive. 

As in the Active Voice, these tenses are dis- 
tinguished by long connecting vowels. 

1. Present Imperfect. 

The personal terminations are the same as 
those of the present indicative. 
(jj'fxai, {r}-<jai) r?, rj-rai, w-fieOa, ri-crOe, tj-vrai. 

In the contract verbs ay becomes a ; arj, a : oy 
becomes oi ; ot^, w. Of all other combinations 
the result is the same as in the consonant verbs. 





Examples. 




C.F. ray. 


I. F. racrff. 


c 


. F. viKa. 


Ta(T(T-u)-fiai, 


Ta(T(T-(t)-fii9a, 


viK(i)-fiaif 


viK(i)-fie9aj 


Taaa-y, 


raaff-rj-crdej 


viKq., 


viKa-aOsj 


Taa<r-r]-Tai, 


Taaa-(jj-vrai. 


VlKU'Taif 


viKio-vrai. 


C.F. 


aive. 


C. 


F. fiiffOo, 


aivbj-fiaif 


aiv(jj-ne9a, 


IMiaOoj-fiait 


fiicrQuj-fiEOay 


aivy, 


aivr]-aBt, 


fiiaOoi, 


fll(T9(t)-<T9£j 


aivrj-rai, 


aivoj-vTUi. 


fxicrOoj-Tai, 


fii(T9<A)-vTai. 



118 GREEK EXERCISES. 

I. PASSIVE. 

I speak, that we may be saved. If the trees shall 
be a-planting in the garden to-morrow, this lady 
will wish to see (them). The heralds have come* 
in order that a truce may be made. The orator 
will never leave off speaking while thou art 
honoured. If ye are honoured by the king 
of Armenia it will be well. The judge him- 
self has punished the thief, in order that the 
honest citizens may not be plundered. Do you 
wish that we should be sent away ? The same 
shepherd will send a letter, in order that the 
slave may be pursued. If the foxes are sought 
for, they will be found. The base traitors will be 
sent with the army in order that they may be 
guarded. Do not move your legs while the sore 
is being examined by the physician. 

II. MIDDLE. 

Beasts of burden have been hired in order that 
the army may march. You will be prosperous 
whenever you choose virtue rather than worldly- 
good (say, than pleasant things, neut. plur. adj. 
with art.). Do you wish that I should promise 
to come to you ? If the heavy-armed men are 
afraid, we shall not win the battle. The king 
has sent a messenger, in order that he may 
hire as many foreign soldiers as possible. Let 

* Use pres. imperfect of j/»c. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 119 

men act justly, in order that they may not be 
hated. The beggars will not work while they 
receive alms. 

2. Present Perfect. 

This tense is formed of the perfect passive 
participle and the subjunctive of the verb eg. 
Example. 
Xe-\v'fjLevoQ (I), Xe-Xv-fjievoi (jjjulev, 

Xe-Xv-juevoc yg, Xe-Xv-fievoi yrE, 

Xe-Xv-juLEvog r?, Xe-Xv-juevoi oxri. 

So with drjXo, perf. part. S£-StjX(u-ju£vo ; ray, 
perf. part. re-Tay-fxevo ; ypa^, perf. part, ye-ypafi- 

fJLtVO. 

I. passive. 

The messengers themselves will remain until 
the letters have been written. If the Greeks shall 
have been reduced-to- slavery, we shall soon be in 
danger. Whenever this work has been accom- 
plished I will give the pay to the workmen. If 
the truce shall have been made, the islanders will 
rejoice. Unless these things shall have been 
done, the commander will be greatly enraged. 

II. MIDDLE. 

When the generals have replied, the heralds^ 
will go back to the king. If the Scythians have 
got possession of the property, the soldiers will 



120 GREEK EXERCISES. 

immediately follow them. The physician will re- 
main until he has chosen the garment. If ye 
have promised any thing to the fisherman, he will 
certainly expect it.* 

3. AoRisTs Passive. 

The following are the terminations of these 
tenses, which are distinguished from those of the 
same tense in the active voice only by the circum- 
flex accent. These are in reality contracted forms, 
the full forms having £ before the personal termi- 
nations, thus from rax-Oe-oj comes rax'Obi, from 
SK-irXay-e-is), CK-TrXay-w. 

Examples. 
1st Aorist. 2nd Aorist, 

rax-O-Mf Tax-0-ii^iJ.ev, 
rax'O-yg, rax-O-rire, 
Tax-O-yj Tax-O-wai. 



EK-TrXay-ojf EK-TrXay-wjuev, 
EK-irXay-yg, BK-wXay-riTE, 
EK-irXay-y, eK-TrXay-tScri. 



1. This truce shall last (remain) until these 
things are reported to the king. When the 
march is accomplished, the heralds will come. 
If these things are made evident to me, I will 
concede whatf you desire. Unless the scouts 
are sent away immediately, they will not reach 
the city in time. The seed is sown, in order that 
the harvest may be gathered in. Do ye wish that 

* TOVTO. t Plural. 



GREEK EXERCISES. ]21 

we should be slain ? If the Greeks are conquered, 
no one will be safe. The general will not march 
until the army is drawn up. If the house is burnt 
down it will certainly be rebuilt by the owner. 
The ambassador himself advises us to speak truly, 
in order that ye may not be deceived. Remain 
until thou art ordered to go away. This woman 
will delay until the children are found. 

2. The Lacedaemonians will continue the bat- 
tle until the enemies are turned to flight. If you 
are freed from anxiety, we shall be°glad. The 
heavy-armed men rush forward in order that the 
townspeople may be struck with astonishment. 
If this prisoner be put to death, the soldiers will 
act-unjustly. Do not flee until the bridges are cut 
down. We remain at home lest we should be 
injured in the eyes by the wind and dust. 

4. AoRisTS Middle. 

The personal terminations of these tenses are 
the same as those of the present indicative 
passive, the connecting vowels, of course, being 
long, before which the final a of the 1st aor. 
tense form disappears. 

Examples. 
^^^ Aorist. 2nd Aorist. 

(3ov\iv.<r.uj.fiat, (iovXtv-a-io-^itQa, yev-io-ixai, yev-uj-fieSa, 
Pov\ev.(T.y, (3ov\sv.tT.r,-cTee, yev^y, yev-.j-^Oe, 

PovXev.(T.r].Tai, (3ov\sv.(T.w.vTai. ysv-n-rai, yev(o-vrai. 



122 GREEK EXERCISES. 

] . If the shopkeeper receives money from the 
citizen, he will never restore it. We will ascend 
the hill, in order that we may rest on the top. 
If ye plot against me, you shall be punished as 
severely as possible. What shall the soldiers 
themselves have, if they oblige the king in these 
matters?^ The Greeks will not come-to-terms 
with those of the opposite faction before they 
consult with us. Until the ambassador concludes- 
the-truce, he will not send away the interpreter. 
The same commanders are haranguing the sol- 
diers in order that they may fight boldly. 

2. If the horseman perceives that the village 
has been set on fire,t he will ride at-the-top-of-his- 
speed in order that he may report to the captain. 
Until the messengers arrive, the shouting will 
not cease. If you lay-hold-of me, I will strike 
you with this stick. These guides will lead you 
as safely as possible, if the truce be agreed upon 
(say, takes place). If we promise any thing we 
will not deceive you. Unless the deserters follow 
the army, they will be captured. 



XXXVII.— Tenses of the Optative. 
Most of these tenses are distinguished from 
the corresponding tenses of the indicative by the 
characteristic m or l, as in the Active Voice. 

* Neut. plur. of rovro. t Perf. participle. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



123 



All the tenses, except the aorists passive, have 
the same personal terminations as the past tenses 
of the indicative, with the exception, that as there 
are no connecting vowels in the optative, the 2nd 
person sing, ends in o, not ou ( = £o), as in the 
indicative. 

1. Past Imperfect. 

Examples. 



Ta<T(T-Ol.-flT)V, 


raffcr-oi-fieOa, 


viKqt-firjv, 


viKqi-fitOa, 


Tacr(T-oi-o, 


ra(T(r-0L'(T9e, 


VlK(iJ-0, 


viKif-ffOe, 


Ta<T<T-Ol-TO, 


Taca-oi-vTO. 


. VLK(^-TOj 


VlKl^-VTO. 


aivoi-^iTfVf 


aLvot-fisOa, 


jJLKTOoi-firjV, 


fiKrOoi-ixeOa, 


aivoi-Of 


aivoL-<T9e, 


fiiaBoi'O, 


[XKrQoi-crOe, 


aivoi-TOj 


aivoi-vTo. 


fii(T9oL-ro, 


fj-iaQoi-VTO. 



I. passive. 
The impudent boy said he was admired for his 
industry. We were inquiring whether the nations 
of Asia were being conquered. The messengers 
answered that we were being asked about the 
constitution. The king of the barbarians did 
this in order that the Greeks might be frightened. 
The citizens knew that the traitor was being led 
to death. The women themselves suspected that 
(jurj) the golden ornaments were hid in the iron 
box. The foolish citizen had reported that a lion 
was often seen in the wood. The aUies wondered 
that we were not deceived. The interpreter said 
the master would stay in the village while the 
servants were being punished. The witness sug- 



124 GREEK EXERCISE?. 

gested this in-order-that {Iva) the thief might 
be persuaded to confess his guilt. If ye should 
be pursued, / also would flee. If the barbarians 
were sailing away, the sailors would be kept in 
prison. If the creditor should sell the farm and 
house, the husbandman would be greatly pitied. 
We heard that the philosopher was annoyed at 
the folly of his own son. 

II. MIDDLE. 

The same soldier said he did not receive suffi- 
cient pay. The creditors used-to-assemble in 
order that they might contribute to the main- 
tenance of the debtor. The islanders wondered 
that we marched through the country without- 
doing-damage. The flatterer replied that he 
always consulted with his friends. These dis- 
ciples inquired whether the-men-of-old* used 
to choose liberty rather than riches. If thou 
wert commanding a very great army, thou 
wouldst not often be at leisure. If the seer 
wished for any thing, he would obtain it from the 
gods to whom he sacrifices. 

2. Past Perfect. 

This tense is made in the same way as the 
Present Perfect Subjunctive : viz. by the perfect 
passive participle and the optative of eg. 

* Use art. with the adverb ' long ago.' 



GREEK EXERCISES. 125 

Example. 

Xe-Xv-fiEvog Hr}v, Xe-Xv-fxevoi eirjimev, 

Xe-Xv-fjLEvog iirig, Xe-Xu-jitsvot eirjTcy 

Xe-Xv-fXEvoQ ur\, Xs-Xv-juevoi eLr}(Tav. 



I. PASSIVE. 

The masters inquired whether the corn had 
been purified as completely as possible. The 
towns-people wondered that the aiFair had not 
been accomplished. The messenger reported that 
the truce had been broken. We said that the 
citizens had been thrown into confusion. 

II. MIDDLE. 

Clearchus himself inquired whether the Greeks 
had replied to the ambassador. The enemy 
knew well that we had encamped. I perceived 
that you had chosen life rather than virtue. These 
robbers learnt that the horsemen had ceased 
riding. 

3. Futures Indefinite Passive. 

Ea^amples. 
1st Future. 2n(i Future. 



Twp-Orja-oi-fiTiVf TV(f)-9ii(T-oi-[i£9a, 

TV^-0r](T-Ol-Oj TV(p-9T](T-Ol-(j9£y 

tv(P'9ti(t-oi-to, Tv^-9ria-oi-vTo. 



XiTT-rjCF-oi-o, \nr-ri<T-oi-<T9f, 
Xnr-ri(T-oi-TO, Xiir-ijcr-oi-vTo. 



1. The woodman said that the other tree would 
be cut down in the evening. ^'^ The philosopher 

* Use genitive. 
M 2 



\ 



12Q GREEK EXERCISES. 

had replied that the boys should be brought 
up most honourably. We inquired whether we 
should be prevented by the horsemen. There 
the scout learnt that ye would be prevented from 
entering the town. It was reported that thou 
wouldst be compelled to quit the country. 

2. The gardeners wondered whether these trees 
would be cut down. The deserters said that we 
should be turned to flight. These women in- 
quired whether thou wast struck with astonish- 
ment. 
4. Future Imperfect, Passive and Middle. 

Example. 
dv'CT'Oi-fxnv, Ov-cT-oi-fXtOay 

dv'G-oi-o, ev-cT-oi-aOe, 

Ov'(J-OL-rO, dv-CT-Oi'VTO. 



I. PASSIVE. 

I heard that the oxen would be sacrificed by 
the priest. The same old men said that we should 
be ensnared in the very narrow passes. The 
soldiers reported that ye would be freed from all 
your troubles. 

II. MIDDLE. 

The farmer inquired whether we would hire 
the land. Thou saidst that thou wouldst get 
possession of our property. This barber replied 
that he would choose the horse rather than the 



GREEK EXERCISES. 127 

camel. I was wondering whether the soldiers 
would pack up their baggage before midnight. 
The islanders themselves inquired whether they 
would march through Greece. We said that we 
would follow the enemy across the broader river. 

5. Future Perfect, Passive and Middle. 

Example, 
re-Ta^-OL-fJLr}v, rs-ra^'Ot-iuLeOa, 

TE-ra^-oL-Oy TS-ra^-oi-crOe, 

TE-ra^-OL-TOf TE-ra^-oi-vTO. 

This tense is also made with the perf. participle 
and the fut. optative of eg. 



I. passive. 

Clearchus said that no friend would be left to 
them. The general reminded them that they 
would be buried in the Cerameicus. The Lace- 
daemonians promised the Tegeans that they 
should be drawn up next to themselves. 

II. middle. 

I told you beforehand that he would not re- 
member you. His friends expected that he would 
possess the estate. He said that the enemy 
would rest when their work was finished (perf. 
opt.) but not before {irpoTspov Se ov). I replied that 
I should have encamped long-before the enemy. 



128 GREEK EXERCISES. 

6. AoRiSTS Passive. 

The terminations are the same as in the aorists 
indicative, but the characteristic ei is inserted 
before them. 

Ea;amples. 
1st Aorist. 2nd Aorist. 

\v-9-£i-Tiv, \v-9-st-rjfiev, a7ro-(TTa\-ei-T]v, a7ro-oTaX-ei-?7/i£v, 
Xv-O'ei-rjg, Xv-O-H-rtTe, aTro-araX-u-riQ, airo-araX-ti-riTe, 
\v-Q-u--n, \v-e-ei r/aav. aTro-oraX-ei-t], a7ro-(rraX-£i-7j(Tav. 



1. Cyrus used-to-find-out as many pretexts as 
possible, in order that ye might be caught unpre- 
pared. If the enemy were seen (imperfect), we 
should be thrown into confusion. Then indeed it 
was known that the man was-secretly-sent by the 
barbarians. The scouts reported that the horses 
were frightened by their fires. The general re- 
mained in the camp until the army was drawn up. 
It seemed fit to us to go forward until Cyrus should 
be found. This interpreter said that the arms were 
o-iven up. Ye were afraid lest the vessels should 
be left behind at the island. If thou shouldst 
be deceived thou wouldst be pardoned. The 
guides replied that their eyes were injured by 
the dust. We knew that what the satrap did 
was praised by the citizens. He was afraid lest 
we should be surrounded from-both-sides. 

2. The sailors wondered that we were turned 
to flight. The judge himself came, in order that 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



129 



the robber might be put to death. We heard that 
all the trees were cut down. If the prisoner 
should be left in the tent, he would be injured by 
the most cruel barbarians. The workmen told 
me that ye were despatched to Athens. 

7. AoRisTs Middle. 



2nd Aorist. 

yeV'Oi-iiijv, yfv-oi-fieOa, 
yev-oi-o, yev-oi-(T9e, 
yev-oi-TO, yeV'Oi-VTO. 



1st Aorist. 

\V'(Ta-i-fiT]Vf Xv-aa-i-fitQuy 
\v-ca-i-o, Xv'ffa-i-crOs, 
Xv-aa-i-ro, \v-aa-i-vTO. 



1. If the enemy were to draw-up-opposite, ye 
would begin to run. They inquired whether the 
king made-a-truce with us. That orator said 
that the Athenians blamed the allies for their 
cowardice. The witness had admitted that his 
brother sent for the tax-gatherer. Ye replied 
that I did not administer your affairs well.^ 
The slaves came together in order that the 
master might gratify them in this respect. If 
you were to make use of my house, I should be 
glad. The commanders heard that the sailors 
exhorted one another. These priests doubted 
whether we vowed the sacrifice to the gods whom 
they served. 

2. The woman herself was asking whether the 
damsel became a nightingaje. I would prefer 



* Ka\(x)Q. 



130 GREEK EXERCISES. 

death to slavery. If the doves were-set-free,* 
would they choose to remain ? It had been re- 
ported that the enemy perceived the approach of 
our horsemen. We remained in the same village 
until we learned where the gold was concealed. 



XXXVIII. — Tenses of the Imperative. 

The following are the personal terminations of 
all these tenses except the aorist passive ; — 

2. 3. 2. 3. 

Sing. (TO, (tOu), Plur. (tOe, o-0wv oro-^wo-av. 

The 2nd sing, in all the tenses but the perfect 
has been changed. 

1. Imperfect. 

Examples. 

\eLir-{e-(jOf e-o)oVf XsLTT-s-crdef 

Xenr-e-aOii), \enT-£-(TOu)v or XetTT-E-o-^wo-av. 

vtK(a-e-Gro, a-e-o)cJ, vfKa-o-^e, 

viKa-(T6it), vLKa-<jBu)v or viKa-aOojcrav. 

<f>lX{e-£'(TO, €-£-o)oU (f)LXH-(T9s3 

<pi\si-<j6ix)y (piXei-dOwv or (piku-ctdwaav. 

8r]X(o-£-(TO,o-£-o)ou, ^rikov-crOsf 

^riXov-crSw, criXov-aO^jjv or dtiXov-trBuyaav. 

* a<l>e9et.ri<TaVf from l ' let go.' 



GREEK EXERCISES. 131 

I. PASSIVE. 

Be not thou deceived by the words of this de- 
ceitful man. Let the servants be summoned. 
Let the plan of the king be explained. Let these 
deserters be sought for in the very thick wood. 
Be not ye frightened by the wild beasts. Be thou 
persuaded by the interpreter. Let not the truce 
be broken by the barbarians. 

II. MIDDLE. 

Ask-for-yourselves^ oh children, not to be ban- 
ished from the land.* Do not hurry, my friend. 
Let the soldiers arm themselves. Let the general 
himself be on his guard against treachery.-f- 
Choose ye whatj ye desire. Let the bowmen 
march quickly into that city. Do not pack up 
your baggage before the evening. Let the 
citizen oblige us in this respect. Hire ye the 
swift horses for the expedition. 

2. Perfect. 
Vide Remarks on the perfect indicative. 

Examples. 



ye-ypaxb-o, ye-ypa(p-9e, 
ye-ypa(j)-9<t), ye-ypa<p-9(i)Vj or 
ye-y pa(p'9ii)aav. 



Ixt-fivri-tTO, fie'fivri-a9e, 
fie-fivi]-<T9(i), fis-fiv7]-<79ujv, or 
lit-}ivri-a9u)aav. 



This tense is used to denote the complete termi- 

* Accusative. t * Against treachery.' ace. 

t Plural. 



132 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



nation of an action, its results being permanent. 
There being no corresponding form in English, 
the meaning of the sentence, as shewn by the 
context, can alone determine when this tense is 
to be used. 



I. PASSIVE. 

Let the letters be written by the boys them- 
selves. Be ye appointed _to transact the affairs of 
the state. Let that constitution also be excluded 
which they call an oligarchy. Let the anchor be 
weighed. Let these robbers be thrown into 
prison. Let your tardiness be limited. Be thou 
taught the Greek language. Be ye enriched, oh 
citizens, with many gifts. Let all things be done 
before I return. Let all things be prepared by 
the servants. Let the doors of the temple be shut. 

II. MIDDLE. 

Let the children cease running. Deliberate 
well before ye do any thing. Receive thou these 
gifts from a true friend. Let the islanders re- 
member to present me with a very beautiful horse. 
Let the workman contrive a more useful machine. 
Remember ye to spare the w^omen and children. 
Let the heavy-armed men pack up their baggage. 

3. AoRiSTS Passive. 

The terminations of these tenses are the fol- 
lowing : — 



GREEK EXERCISES. 133 

2. 3. 2. 3. 

Sing. 6i, TO). Plur. re, rwcrav. 

As the 1 st aorist has the suffix Or^, the termina- 
tion 9i is in that tense changed into rt. 

1st Aorist. 

\v-9r]-TL, \v-9ri-TS, 
Xv-Oij-Tio, \v-9r}-T0)Gav, 

Vide Remarks on the Aorist imperative active. 



2nd Aorist. 

TpaTr-rj-Oi, rpaTr-Tj-re, 
rpaTT-Tj-TO), TpaTV'i)-T()j(Tav. 



1. Let the oxen be sacrificed. Be ye severely 
punished. Reverence the gods, oh young man. 
Let this tree be cut down. Be ye drawn up on 
the top of the hill. Let the bold Persians be de- 
clared generals of the whole army. Be not thou 
induced to leave behind your property. Let the 
same scouts be sent, in order that they may exa- 
mine the country. Let this be reported to the 
sailor. Be ye taught by the elders who are wiser 
than yourselves. Let the robber be killed. Let 
the hares be caught. Let the stolen goods be 
concealed in the darker cave. 

2. Be thou freed from fear, beautiful girl. Let 
these traitors be despatched into the most dan- 
gerous country. Be ye reared with the other 
children at-the-court-of the king. Let the very 
slow horse be spurred. Be thou pierced in the 
ears with a sharp needle. Let the horseman 
be struck with astonishment. Be drowned in 
the sea, ye ravenous wolves. 

N 



134 GREEK EXERCISES. 

4. AoRiSTs Middle. 

The terminations of these tenses are the same 
as those of the imperfect, except in the 2nd per- 
son sing, of the 1st aor., which has the termi- 
nation t. 

Examples. 

1st Aorist. 2nd Aorist. 

f3ov\Bv-(ra-i, jSovXev-cra-crOe, : e\-{e-<To)ov, kX-e-rxOe, 

(5ov\ev-(Ta-(T6u),(5ovXev-<ra-(r9(i)v, or eX-t-aOcjj eX-e-aOujp, or 
(3ovXfv-(7a-<T9()j(Tav, ' tX-e-crObXTav. 



1. Let the sheep feed in this field to-morrow. 
Resolve, oh ambassadors, what ye will reply. 
Taste this apple, dear child. Let the weary 
soldiers pack up their baggage. Let the general 
himself encamp on the other side of the river Eu- 
phrates. Encamp near the villages of the Cili- 
cians. Let the younger oblige the elders in all 
things. Blame me, my friend, after you have 
heard my defence. Send-thou-for the same guide, 
and he will lead you as safely as possible. Arm 
yourselves, and run to the camp. 

2. Perish ye evil-doers. Choose wisdom, oh 
boy, rather than riches. Let the guards lay-hold- 
of the robber by the throat. Let the beggar 
come hither. Promise that thou wilt come (fut. 
inf.). Have-an-interview, oh generals, with the 
king's messengers. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 135 

XXXIX. — Infinitives. 

Remark. The suffix of all the passive and 
middle infinitives, except the aorists passive, is 
(rOai ; or, v^^ith the connecting vowel, e-aOai. This 
suffix is added to the respective Tense Forms. 

Vide Remarks on the active infinitive, Exerc. 
XXIV. 

1. Imperfect. 

Ea^amples. 
\v, Xv'EcrOaif to be loosened ; Xaj3, Xafif3av-e- 
crOai ; viKUj viKCL-crOai ; ^tXe, (juXii-aOai ; ^tjXo, ^y}- 
Xov-crOai. 



I. passive. 
We heard that this attendant v^^as admired for 
his kindness and faithfulness. The sons of the 
noblest Persians learn while- they- are "^ yet boys 
both to command and to obey (say, to be com- 
manded). They reply that this man is consi- 
dered the best (strongest) of all in all things.f 
From J what^ I hear, I judge that no one either || 
of Greeks or|| of barbarians, is admired by more 
(persons) than Cyrus. It is said that another 
innumerable army is collecting by Xerxes. Ye 
will find that Menon is praised for his knowledge 
of things § which-relate-to^"^ the drawing-up-of- 

* Part, of eg. f Ace. J e^> 

II Plur. relative. || In Greek, negatives must be used. 

§ Article. ** afifi (with ace). 



136 GREEK EXERCISES. 

troops. We shall seem to be prevented froin- 
doing=* these things. I hear that the kmg is 
honoured by the enemies themselves. It is said 
that he is being brought up according to the laws 
of the Persians. The dog said to the sheep, I am 
the-one-who preservesf you, so that you may 
neither be stolen J by men, nor be carried ofFJ by 
wolves. 

II. MIDDLE AND DEPONENT. 

The Greeks wish to march against the king 
himself. He ordered the rest to pack up their 
baggage. It is time for us to prepare. It-is- 
well^ to abstain from loquacious (persons). I 
wish to speak with thee. The guide wishes to oblige 
us. The ambassadors advise you to save your- 
selves any-way-by-which II it is possible. The 
false messenger reported that you were beginning 
the war. Cyrus ordered us to rush forward as 
quickly as possible. It is time to hire soldiers 
and to defend ourselves. The very cowardly 
captain is afraid to follow with Cyrus. 

2. Future Imperfect. 

Vide Exerc. XXVIL, and Remarks on the 
Future Infinitive Active. 



* Infinitive. f Art. and imperf. part. 

Imperf. infin. % tv exu. || oTvy. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 137 

Examples. 
Xey, X£^-£(r0at ; jSovXeu, j3ovX£u-o--£(r0ai ; v£ju, 
Fut. T. F. v£/x£, veiuei-dOai ; iprfcpi^, Fut. T. F. 



I. PASSIVE. 

I think that these things will be said by 
the generals. The scouts expected that the ox 
would be sacrificed in the same tent. There is a 
report that the boys will be brought up at the 
court of the king. The very base traitors said 
that we should be freed from anxiety. Who de- 
sires that ye should be ensnared by the enemy ? 

II. MIDDLE. 

The barbarians are going to sail away. I 
conjectured that the great king would arrive at 
daybreak. The soldiers are about to see ten 
thousand camels. The generals were going to 
consult concerning the march. The shepherd 
thinks the sheep will feed along the broader 
river. The soldiers are going to arm themselves. 
I think that the Athenians will pass a sentence 
of death against him (say, will sentence death 
against him). We expected that the teacher 
would offer to teach these boys the Greek lan- 
guage. 

3. Future Indefinite Passive. 

Vide Exerc. XXVIII. 
N 2 



138 GREEK EXERCISES. 

Examj)les. 
\vj Xv'9r}(7-£(T6ai; cfteX, aTaX-r)(T-e(j6at. 



1. The king himself was about to be seen* in 
the market-place. The deserter is about to be 
led out to death on account of his unfaithfulness. 
The enemy hoped that the king would be 
wounded by the commander of the Greeks. I 
expect that the army of the Greeks will be scat- 
tered. The youth says that the king will be 
brought still living into the palace. The inter- 
preter explained that some would be brought 
byt sea, others byf land. The youths suspect 
that the haughty priests will be prevented from 
coming into the house. From what I heard, 
I judged that these actions would be considered 
most disgraceful by the king. 

2. We hear that the interpreter suspects that 
these horsemen v/ill be turned to flight as easily 
as possible. The priest suspected that the bar- 
bers would be struck with astonishment. There 
is no doubt that this report will be spread through 
the whole city. The general swore that the ships 
should be sent away. 

4. AoRisTS Passive. 

Remark. The suffix for both the aorist passive 
infinitives is vai. . 

* Fut. infin. t Kara, with ace. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 139 

Vide ExERc. XXX. 

Examples. 

Au, \v-dr\-vaL ; air-aXKay, air-aXXay-ri-vai ; 
kXctt, icXaTT-rj-vat. 



1. The generals determined (say, it seemed fit 
to the generals) that this slave should not^ be 
loosed. The king determined that the cities 
should be given to Cyrus, as-he-was (say, being) 
his brother. The commanders determined that 
the same herald should be sent to the people-of- 
Miletus. The report was spread that the corn 
was stolen. The citizens heard that the priest 
himself was wounded in his thigh. I find that 
the sweetest wine w^as all drunk up by the very 
thirsty soldiers. There was a report that the 
generals all had their heads cut off (say, were cut 
off their heads). It is said that the boy was 
bitten by the dog. It was said that the guide 
was thrown into confusion on-a-sudden. The 
more credulous women believed that all these 
difficulties were surmounted as quickly as pos- 
sible. 

2. It was determined not to allow the other 
vessel to be sent away. The report was spread 
into the city that the enemies were scattered. 
The herald brought word that the corn was spoilt. 



Mr]. 



140 GREEK EXERCISES. 

It was said that the horsemen were struck with 
astonishment. 

5. First Aorist Middle. 

Examples, 
BouXeu, j3oi>Xsu-(7a, j5ov\ev'(Ta-(T6ai; vtfi, vufi-a, 
veifi-a-aOai. 



1. The enemies will not have leisure (say, lei- 
sure will not be to the enemies) to consult or to 
prepare themselves. We wish to make a truce. 
Cyrus was pleased with this wine; he wishes 
therefore you also to taste it (say, this). The 
very brave soldiers wished to arm themselves 
with breastplates and helmets. By-a-herald-he- 
ordered the Greeks to rush forward. Now-then 
there is an opportunity for thee to show off thy 
education. 

2. Whether dost thou wish, to answer or not ? 
The tyrant himself is said to have confiscated 
their property (say, the property of them). We 
will endeavour, with-the-aid-of the gods, to re- 
pulse him. I advise you 'to answer with-mode- 
ration. 

6. Second Aorist Middle. 

Ea;ample. 



These (men) are said to have taken Orontes 



GREEK EXERCISES. 141 

by the girdle for death (i. e. to take him to be 
put to death). Clearchus determined (say, it 
seemed fit to, &c.) to have-an-interview with 
Tissaphernes. They say that the general per- 
ceived thee plotting against the king as plainly 
as possible. There was a true report that the 
traitor perished. The flatterers said that the 
rich men chose the sweetest flowers. The scouts 
found that the Persians turned away (mid.) from 
the very deep river. 

7. Perfect, Passive and Middle. 

Remark. This infinitive takes the reduplica- 
tion, and the sufiix (rOai. 

For the particular rules respecting the redupli- 
cation and the euphonic changes of the Crude 
Form, vide Exerc. XXXIII. 

EiTamples. 
AVf Xe-Xv-crOai ; ypac^t, ye-y pa(f)-9ai ; /3Xaj3, 
pe-jdXa^-Oai ] ray, Te-Ta\-Oai'y opOo, (jjpOcj-aOai ; 
aiTEp, S'cnrap-Oai. 



I. PASSIVE. 

The enemies are said to have been shut up in 
(say, into) the very strong citadel. The sons of 
Xenophon are said to have been brought up in 
Sparta. I hear that this truce has been broken 
by the Lacedaemonians. It is said that very 
beautiful peacocks have been reared by the Sami- 



142 GREEK EXERCISES. 

ans in-honour-of (say, to) Hera. The merchants 
reported that the robbers had been murdered by 
them. I find that the letters have been written 
well by the youths. The farmer asserts that the 
corn has been injured. Ye think that the army 
of the Greeks has been scattered. It was said 
that the rear-guard had been conquered. From 
what we hear, we judge that no one has been 
admired and praised for wisdom and justice more 
than Socrates (has). It is said that the villains 
have been sought for. His mother believed that 
the boy had been bitten by the same dog. The 
orator said that many temples had been built by 
the Athenians in-honour-of (say, to) the gods. 

II. MIDDLE AND DEPONENT. 

I consider that thou hast consulted well. We 
conjecture that the generals have marched through 
this country with as large an army as possible. 
That messenger answers that the soldiers have 
packed up their baggage. They say that the 
king has chosen those generals. The messenger 
thinks that the rower has answered with-mode- 
ration. 

8. Future Perfect, Passive and Middle. 

Remark. This infinitive is made by the re- 
duplication prefixed, and the termination eadai. 

Example. 
C.F. Xv, Inf. Fut. Perf. Xs-Xv-cr-eaOai. 



il 



GREEK EXERCISES. 143 



I. PASSIVE. 



I conjecture that we shall have been left be- 
hind by the generals. We expected that the 
letters would be written. The interpreter says 
that no friend will have been left to us, but that 
even those who were (so) before, will be our ene- 
mies. The guards suspect that the gates will 
be shut the whole night. The deserter replied 
that a hundred citizens would be murdered by the 
enemies. It is reported that the force of the Per- 
sians will have been defeated by the Greeks. 
We hear that the additional-settlers will be 
enrolled in (eig) the city. The lawgiver used to 
boast that the constitution would be perfectly 
arranged. 

II. MIDDLE. 

I expect that few will have received so many 
gifts. This shopkeeper conjectures that many will 
have-got-possession-of horses and servants. The 
women fear that the boy will not remember the 
road. The guides reply that the enemies will 
have encamped in the same country. 



XL. — Participles. 

Remark. — The suffix of all the passive and 
middle participles, except the aorists passive, is 
|U£vo (M. k N.) jueva (F.), or, with the connecting 



144 GREEK EXERCISES. 

vowel, o-fjLEvo and o-fXEva ; this suffix is added to 
the respective Tense Forms. 

Vide Remarks on the active participles, Exerc. 
XXV. 

1. Imperfect. 

Ea^amples. 

XVf AV-O/ilEVO ; TVTT-T, TVir-T-OjULeVO; ViKa, VIKU)- 

fifvo; (pike, (piXov-juevo; dr^Xo, SrjXou-juevo. 



I. passive. 

This army escaped notice, being maintained for 
him. Aristippus, being oppressed by those of the 
opposite faction at-home, comes to Cyrus. The 
cities committed (to him) trusted him. The 
generals died amidst insults (say, being insulted). 
Artaxerxes w^as evidently (say, evident) being 
plotted against. Those conquered by us are 
ready to begin flight. Being hard pressed, and 
being thrown into confusion, the women will 
march with difficulty. He happened to be 
wounded at the very instant."^ Colonists are 
sent out on-the-condition-of-their-beingf equal to 
those left (behind). The general crosses the very 
broad river Tigres, being wetted up to the middle. 
These ladies are conscious of being loved by their 
servants. 

t £7ri T({) eivai. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 145 

II. MIDDLE AND DEPONENT. 

To US marching through the country there will 
be an abundance of provisions. Cyrus was not 
afraid-of a bear once when-it-attacked (him) 
(part.). All his (the) friends and messmates died 
fighting for Cyrus. Thus following, we shall be 
friends to him. Though-the-king-sends-for (gen. 
abs.) me, I do not wish to go. The soldiers per- 
ceiving these things, were beginning to run. 
Sometimes, in getting-wood from the same (place), 
the Greeks and barbarians inflicted blows on one 
another.* The king himself surveyed the Greeks 
as they passed by. Cheirisophus happened to be 
away in some village with others, laying-in-pro- 
visions. This farmer happened to be hiring more 
servants. 

2. Future Imperfect, 
Vide ExERC. XXVII. 

Examples. 
Ovj Ov-(T-oiuLevo ; (5ov\sv, j^ovXev-cr-ofxevo ; vejUy 
ve/uL-ovjuevo ; ^rj<^tS, ^r}(lii-oviuLEVo. 



I. PASSIVE. 

The more beautiful oxen are led into the same 
garden to be sacrificed. I admire the-man-who 
is about to be freed (art. and fut. part.) from fear 

* Dative. 
O 



146 GREEK EXERCISES. 

and anxiety. The women about to be buried with 
their children weep. 

II. MIDDLE. 

These are they who will attack us as we cross 
over. In the mean time (say, in this) Cheiriso- 
phus sends (some) of those from the village to 
reconnoitre matters there. They ran outside to 
see what (was) the row. We will advise those 
who are about to obey him. The sailors are pre- 
paring as diligently as possible to set sail to- 
morrow. The king sends forward some soldiers 
to take (possession of) the place. The goats were 
driven together to feed in the field. The boy 
will come to receive the other present. Cyrus 
sends the soldiers to occupy the eminences be- 
forehand. 

3. Future Indefinite Passive. 
Vide Exerc. XXVIII. 

Examples. 
\vy Xv-Brja-Ofievo ; CK-TrXij-y, SK-TrXay-Tjor-OjUfvo. 



1. The slave who is about to be set free (loosed) 
rejoices. Those who are about to be led to death 
are afraid. The citizens will not oblige the 
satraps who are about to be sent away. The 
troops about to be thrown into confusion by the 
enemies flee. We will defend the women about 
to be pursued by the enemies. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 147 

2. Pity him who is about to be afflicted by 
many evils. The men about to be sent away 
have been conquered. The fruit of wisdom, 
which will never be destroyed (say, never about 
to be destroyed), is admired by all. 

4. AoRisTS Passive. 

Remark. For the mode of forming the Tense 
Form of the aorists passive, vide Exerc. XXX. 

The suffix of the participle is vt added to the 
Tense Form, the r? being shortened into e. 

The masc. and neut. participles are declined in 
the same way as nouns of the consonant declen- 
sion ; the nom. sing. masc. being made by adding 
c, before which the vr go out, and the e becomes 
el: thus, Xv, Xv-0-£vr; N.S. Xi»-0-£fc- The same 
changes occur in the dat. plural. The neut. nom. 
and ace. sing, is made by dropping the r ; e. g. 
\v-0-evt 

The fem. is made by the suffix craj before which 
the same changes take place as in the nom. sing. 
masc. ; e. g. Xv-O-ei-aa. It is declined like the 
nouns comprised in Rule 2. Rem. 1. Exerc. VI. 



1. Cyrus went away having been dishonoured. 
The women went away, having incurred danger, 
and having been dishonoured. We have over- 
taken those left behind. The king, having been 
enraged with the messenger, spoke thus. Having 



148 GREEK EXERCISES. 

been thrown into confusion, the beasts of burden 
fled. Having been armed with breastplates, they 
came. Cyrus, having been declared general, 
comes to the army. Having been drawn up op- 
posite, they killed as many of the plunderers as 
possible (say, of those plundering). This girl 
having been caught, told the king what had been 
done in the battle (say, the things in the battle 
done). To Phalynus, who had been sent (say, 
having been sent) from the king, we gave this 
advice (say, advised these things). 

2. They, having been collected, came into the 
park. The horsemen followed the barbarians 
who had turned.* The soldiers, having been 
freed from fear, fled. Having been maintained 
by the cattle which they took from the Taochi, 
the king's daughters remained in the country. 
These things seemed fit to them, being assembled. 
Cyrus orders Aristippus, having been reconciled 
to those at home, to send away the army as se- 
cretly as possible.t 

5. First Aorist Middle. 

Examples. 
f5ov\eVf (5ov\ev-(Ta-/iiEvo ; veju, vufi-a-fx^vo. 



Cheirisophus having sacrificed, led them along 
the road. Having armed themselves and procured 

* CTpicp. t iiQ fiaXlCTTa Kpvipaibjg. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 149* 

provisions, they began to ascend the more lofty- 
mountains. Having packed up their baggage, 
they immediately marched through deep (say, 
much) snow, with (say, having) many guides. 
Having prayed to the gods, and having-drawn-up 
-in-order as for battle, they encamped in the 
plain. The virgins had run-away, having hired a 
boat from the village. These were those who had 
routed the king. Then, having exhorted one 
another, the bold women advance to the for- 
tified place. The barbarians went away, having 
answered nothing. The sheep having fed in the 
meadow were slaughtered. 

6. Second Aorist Middle. 

Example. 



Those about Ariaeus having turned away, w^ent 
off another road. Having perceived the barba- 
rians, the soldiers' wives pelted them with stones. 
The children having perished had sunk in the sea. 
And he, having taken hold of the right hand of 
the king, spoke thus. A wind and storm having 
arisen prevented them from setting sail. The 
girl having inquired these things from the philoso- 
pher, laughed. Having turned away, the youths 
o 2 



•150 GREEK EXERCISES. 

went-off (some one way, and) others another 
way.* 

7. Perfect Participle. 

Remark. This participle takes the redupHca- 
tion and the suffix ij.evo or fieva. 

For the particular rules respecting the redupli- 
cation and the euphonic changes of the Crude 
Form, see Exerc. XXXIII. 

E^^amples. 

Xv, Xt-Xu-JUEVO ; TptTTf TE-rpajUL-IHevO ; (TKEVaS, 

£-(TKEva(T-iuevo ; aivt, yvti-fievo ; SrjXo ; Se-^tjXw- 
-fiEvo : rajy rE-Tay-jiivo. 

I. PASSIVE. 

Those drawn up before the king were turned 
(imperf.) to flight. The royal standard was an 
eagle extended on a shield. These chariots had 
scythes extended obliquely from the axles. Hence 
Cyrus marches on one stage with the whole army 
(dative without aw) drawn up together, both the 
Grecian and the barbarian. They all had their 
shields polished. The priest examines the entrails 
when-taken-out. These things having been ex- 
plained, no-longer seem unjust. I recognize these 
things from the armour f (arms) which is buried 
with (them). There they remained three days for- 
the-sake of the wounded. The eminences (high- 
banks) on which they (say, these) were drawn up 

* Ace. t Dat. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 151 

were distant three or four plethra from the river. 
They had thick ropes twisted round. They cut 
off those of the Greeks who were scattered in the 
plain. There were houses furnished with all- 
sorts-of copper-vessels.^ And there were left also 
both the (man) injured f in the eyes by the snow, 
and the (man) who by-reason-ofj the cold had 
had his toes ^ rotted off. When this phalanx was 
broken up (say, this phalanx being broken up, 
gen. abs.) he fled. 

II. MIDDLE. 

They cut off some of those-who-had-plotted 
against the queen (art. and perf. part.). The 
seers had declared that the battle would take 
place (say, would be). I am conscious to myself 
of having deceived him in nothing. The generals 
praise the women who have chosen the beautiful 
gifts. 

8. Future Perfect Participle. 
Vide ExERC. XXXV. 

Examples. 
\vf Xe-Xv-a-o-fxevo ; irpay, we-TTpa^-o-iJ.evo. 



I. PASSIVE. 

Few are those who will have been left. Many 



* Dat. t ^t 

X VTTO. ^ Say, fingers of the feet. 



152 GREEK EXERCISES. 

are those who will have been drawn up in the 
plain. I pity those who will be imprisoned. The 
things which will be sold are no longer in thy 
power (tTTf (joi). 

II. MIDDLE. 

The priest reverences those who will have sacri- 
ficed. He again roused up those about to rest 
themselves. We are-anxiously-expecting those 
who-will-get-possession-of the farm. 



XLI. — The Dual Number of Nouns, Adjec- 
tives, AND Participles, and of the Active 
Verb. 

Remark 1. The Greek language has a sepa- 
rate set of inflections for words, when they refer 
to two persons or things. These inflections which 
are distinguished as the Dual Number, belonged 
to the language in its earlier stages ; but as a 
distinction so minute as that between two and 
three is liable to be forgotten or neglected, so the 
forms for expressing the distinction fell gradually 
into disuse. In the older specimens of the lan- 
guage the Dual Number occurs frequently; but 
as we come down to the later authors it occurs 
less and less frequently, until at length it is 
wholly lost out of the language. A decisive proof 
of this is the fact that Euclid, who writes with 
mathematical precision, has not a single instance 



GREEK EXERCISES. 153 

of the Dual Number, even where he is speaking 
of the two sides of a triangle, where it might have 
added to the clearness of the demonstration ; but 
it was not in the language of his day, and there- 
fore he did not use it. 

In the New Testament no Dual Form occurs. 
There is no Dual in Modern Greek. 

Remark 2. The following are the rules for the 
formation of the dual number of substantives. 

1. For the five cases of nouns the dual number 
has only two forms : one for the nominative, 
vocative, and accusative, and one for the genitive 
and dative. 

2. The nominative, vocative, and accusative 
are made by adding e, and the genitive and 
dative by adding iv to the Crude Form. 

3. Nouns in o and a have the e contracted with 
the o and a in the nominative, accusative, and 
vocative ; o£ into w, ae into d ; thus, avOptj-rroB 
becomes avOfjujTTu), and vaavtae becomes veavid : 
and in the genitive and dative the i forms diph- 
thongs with the a and o : thus, veavia-iv and 
av9pii)Tro-iv. 

4. When the Crude Form ends in a consonant, 
u, or (, the nom. voc. and ace. is made bye affixed 
to the Crude Form, without any other change 
taking place ; thus, C. F. -^eXi^ov ' a swallow ;' 
Dual, nominative, accusative, and vocative, x^' 
Xl^ovb; but in the genitive and dative the tv is 
lengthened into oiv, as, x^^^^o^^o^v- 



154 GREEK EXERCISES. 

The article, adjectives, and participles follow 
the same rules. But the article and pronominal 
adjectives almost always, and participles often, 
use the same form for all three genders in the 
nom. and ace. dual. 

Remark 3. The following are the rules for 
the formation of the dual of active verbs. 

1. There is no first person dual. 

2. The suffix for the 2nd person dual is tov in 
all the tenses of all the moods. When the Tense 
Form ends in a consonant, the connecting vowel 
of the 2nd person dual is e, except in the sub- 
junctive, which has t]. 

3. The suffix for the 3rd person dual in all the 
tenses of the subjunctive, and in all the tenses of 
the indicative, except the past tenses, is also tov : 
in the past tenses of the indicative, and in all the 
tenses of the optative (which also Sire past tenses) 
its suffix is TYfv ; in the imperative it is twv. The 
rule respecting the connecting vowel of the 2nd 
person applies to all the suffixes of the 3rd 
also.* 

4. The regular vowel changes take place in the 
dual of contract verbs. 

Remark 4. As the dual is of rare occurrence. 



* There is reason to think that in the Attic dialect the 2nd and 
3rd persons dual were alike in the past tenses as well as in the 
present and future, the suffix of both persons in the past tenses 
being njv. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 155 

the exercises given upon it will be confined to the 
tenses of the indicative. 

1. Present Imperfect. 

The two generals are come- The enemies are 
burning both the tents of the two generals. The 
youths bring the two horses to Orchomenos in 
Boeotia. Ye two have the fortified place. Ye 
two are seeking for the messenger in the park. 
The two philosophers teach the two boys these 
things. Ye two are explaining the law to the 
judge. Both the bowmen hit the two marks. 

2. Future. 

Both the shepherds will come. The two old 
men, with the two boys, will be ill. The two 
slaves will carry the load into the house. The 
two Greeks will report this to the commander. 
The two slaves will clear the land. Both the 
generals will remain in the tent. Ye will both 
consider this an honour. Ye two will not care 
for the war. The two vessels will sail away. 

3. Perfect. 

The old men have both died. Ye have both 
learnt the Persian language. The two generals 
have sacrificed in Aulis. The two kings have 
enriched the commander. Ye two have punished 
the priest. The shepherds have both fled out of 
the field. The soldiers have burnt down the two 



156 



GREEK EXERCISES. 



fortifications. The Greeks have both expended 
the money. 

4. Past Imperfect. 
Ye two were writing the two letters in the tent. 
Ye two were sending the messengers to Thebes. 
The soldiers were burying the two commanders in 
the plain. The youths both considered you to be 
very skilful about nautical affairs. 

5. Second Aorist. 

Ye both left the country. The Persians fled 
out of the two camps. The two boys had equal 
shares allotted them. The commanders both 
died in the battle. Ye two threw away the 
shields. 

6. First Aorist. 

The two soldiers buried the generals in the i 
plain. Ye two examined the house. The boys 
both struck the sisters of the two messengers. 
The two generals wrote the letters. Ye two J 
burnt down some trees, and cut down others. 
The Arcadians both sacrificed to Apollo. Ye 
both remained seven days. The two slaves did 
not sow equally in the two fields. 

7. Past Perfect. 

Ye had both learnt the Greek language. Ye 
had both broken the truce. The two satraps had 
sailed away to Ephesus. The two interpreters 
had imitated us. 



GREEK EXERCISES. 157 

XLII. — The Dual Number of the Passive 
AND Middle Verb. 

Remark 1. The following are the rules for 
the formation of the dual of the passive and 
middle. 

1. There is a form for the 1st person in all 
the tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, and opta- 
tive, except the aorists passive, which, as well as 
the tenses of the imperative, both passive and 
middle, have no 1st persons. 

The suffix for the first person dual is jueOov. 

Note. — The two following rules do not apply 
to the aorists passive, which throughout have the 
same suffixes for the 2nd and 3rd persons dual, 
as in the active voice. 

2. In all the tenses of all the moods the suffix 
of the 2nd person dual is crdov. 

3. The suffix for the 3rd person dual in all the 
tenses of the indicative, except the past tenses, 
and in all the tenses of the subjunctive, is the 
same as that of the 2nd, viz. aQov. In the past 
tenses of the indicative, and in all the tenses of 
the optative it is o-^rjv. The suffix of the tenses 
of the imperative is aOwv. 

Remark 2. The connecting vowels of the ] st 
person dual are the same as those of the 1st 
person plural ; those of the 2nd and 3rd are the 
same as those of the 2nd person plural. 

Remark 3. The rules respecting the euphonic 
p 



158 GREEK EXERCISES. 

changes in the perfect passive (Vide Exerc. 
XXXIII.) of course apply to the dual number. 

1. Present Imperfect, 
passive. 

We are both being sent by the king. Ye are both 
being led to death. They are both being brought 
up at the court of Croesus. Both of them are 
said to be among the wisest of the Greeks. 

MIDDLE. 

We are both consulting concerning the safety 
of the array. The two soldiers are fighting nobly 
for their country. The two messengers are 
choosing their arms. I 

2. Future. 

PASSIVE. 

The two oxen will be sacrificed on the emi- 
nences. The soldiers will both be left in the 
plain. We shall both be compelled to do these 
things. Ye will both be prevented from doing 
this. They will both be hired by my father. 

MIDDLE. 

We shall both consult concerning these things. 
Ye will both obey the king. The two armies will 
march in the night. Ye will both pack up your I 
baggage before the evening. 



greek exercises. 159 

3. Present Perfect. 

PASSIVE. 

We two have been brought up at the king's 
gates. The two letters have been written by the 
boy. The two stewards have been wounded by 
the youth. The two generals have been con- 
quered. Ye two have been taught to rule. 

MIDDLE. 

We two have learnt these things from the 
deserters. The two slaves have tasted of Hberty. 
The two armies have encamped near the bridge. 
We have both been annoyed at your doing (say, 
you doing ; gen. abs.) these things. 

4. Future Perfect. 

PASSIVE. 

We shall both have been left behind by thee. 
Ye will both have been sent to Corinth. The 
two trees will have been cut down. 

MIDDLE. 

We shall both have dehberated well before the 
work. Ye will both have rested. The two ar- 
mies will have encamped in the plain. 

5. Past Imperfect. 

PASSIVE. 

We were both admired by the soldiers. Ye 
were both loved by Croesus. The two trees were 
planted in the garden. 



160 GREEK EXERCISES. 

MIDDLE. 

We both followed the laws. Ye both fought 
boldly for your country. The two horsemen did 
not perceive the plot against them. 

6. Past Perfect. 

PASSIVE. 

We had both been taught to do these things. 
Ye had both been wounded in the thigh. The two 
letters had been written by the youth in Egyptian. 

MIDDLE. 

We had both hired the same servant. Ye 
had both obliged us in these (points). The two 
slaves had tasted of liberty. 

7. AORISTS. 
PASSIVE. 

Ye were both sent by Cyrus to Tarsus. Ye 

were both taught to write letters in Greek. The 

two letters were explained by the Scythian. The 
two generals were terrified. 

MIDDLE. 

1. We both vowed a sacrifice to Apollo. Ye 
two, having walked from the camp to the sea, 
rested. They both began to wonder when they 
saw the splendour of the army. 

2. We both perceived the plot. Ye both heard 
of Cyrus from the king. The barbarians turned 
to piracy. 



161 



APPENDIX. 



I. — Some Irregular Nouns and Adjectives 
Declined. 



(3ov or (3o¥ 'ox.' 




vav or vaF ' ship.' 


Singular. Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. (iovQ, (3oeg. 




N. vav-g, 


vri-eg. 


A. l3ovv, (SovQ, (Soag. 


A. vav-v, 


vav'g. 


G. (3oog, (SoiSv. 




G. va-cjgy 


vt'Sjv. 


D. /3ot, jSovffu 




D. vri-'i, 


vav-di. 


Vide p. 96 for the declension of avep. 






fitya 'great.' 






Singular. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


N. fieyag, 


lieyaXn, 


Htya. 


A. fxtyav, 


fieyaXriv, 


fxeya. 


G. fieyaXoVf 


fieyaXrjg, 


{isyaXov. 


D. fieyaXqt, 


fityaXy, 


[X(yaX(i>. 


V. fisyaXe, 


fieyaXr} 


fieya. 


The dual and plural are regularly formed from the Crude Form 


fisyaXo or [xeyaXa. 






TToXv 


'many,' or ' much.' 
Singular. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


N. TToXvg, 


TroWj;, 


TToXv. 


A. TToXvv, 


TToXXriVj 


TToXv. 


G. TTOXXOV, 


TToXXrjg, 


TToXXoV. 


D. •n-oW^, 


TToXXyy 


TToXXtit. 


The dual and plural are regularly formed from the Crude Form 


TToXXo. 








I 


2 





162 APPENDIX. 

II. — Synopsis of the Rules of Formation of 
THE Greek Verb. 

1. Rules applicable to all the Voices. 

1. The Increased Form is used only in the present and past 
imperfect tenses of all the moods, and in the imperfect infinitive 
and participle. 

2. The augment belongs to the indicative only : the tenses which 
take it are the past imperfect, the past perfect, and the aorists. 

[For the rules relating to the augment, vide pp. 36, 37.] 

3. The reduplication belongs to the perfect tenses, present, 
past, and future, in aU the moods, and to the perfect infinitive 
and participle. (Vide pp. 51, 52.) 

4. The subjunctive tenses are distinguished from the corre- 
sponding tenses of the indicative by long connecting vowels. 

5. The tenses of the optative are distinguished from the corre- 
sponding tenses of the indicative by the characteristic oi or t. 

6. The Tense Forms of the subjunctive and optative are the 
same as those of the indicative. 



2. Terminations of the Active Voice, with the 
connecting or characteristic vowels. 

1. Indicative Mood. 
Present Imperfect and Future. 
Singular. Plural. 

1 2 3 Ij 1 2 3 

i.0 I ti-Q I «. || 0-fxev j £-r£ | ov-<n. 

Past Imperfect, and Second Aorist. 
O-V \ t'Q I £. II O-fliV 1 i-Tt I o-v. 

first Aorist. 
a I a-g \ c. || a-fiev | a-re \ a-v. 



APPENDIX. 163 

Present Perfect 
Singular. Plural. 

1 2 3 || 1 2 3 

a \ a-g | f. |1 a-fiev \ a-re | a-ai. 

Past Perfect, 
ei-v I Ei-e I ei. Ij ei-fiev I ei-re I s-aav. 

t] \ T)-g I £t. II e-)ttfv I e-re \ e-<Tav. 

2. Subjunctive Mood. 

All the Tenses fall being Present) . 
ui j y-g j y. || lo-fxev \ rj-re \ w-cri. 

3. Optative Mood. 
All the Tenses except the \st Aorist (all being Past). 
oi-fii I oi-g j 01. II oi-fiev \ oi-re | oi-tv. 

First Aorist. 
ai-fii 1 at-g \ ai. \\ ai-[itv | ai-re \ ai-tv. 

4. Imperative Mood. 
Imperfect, Perfect, and Second Aorist. 

e-TOjaavor 

O-VTUtV. 



First Aorist. 



a-rwerav 
ora-vrti»v. 



5. Infinitives. 
Imperf., Future, and 2nd Aor., uv, 
1st Aorist, a-i. Perfect, ev-ai. 

6. Participles (Crude Forms). 
Imperf., Fut. and 2nd Apr., o-vt (M. & N.), ovtra (F.). 
1st Aor., a-vT (M. & N.), d-<7a (F.). 
Perf. or (M. & N.), vta (F.). 



164 



APPENDIX. 



3. Terminations of the tenses^ Sfc.f common to the j 
Passive and Middle Voices, with the connecting \\ 
or characteristic vowels. 

1. Indicative Mood. 
Present Imperfect and Futures Imperfect and Perfect. 
Singular. Plural. 



1 


2 


3 


1 


2 


3 


-fiat 


y 


e-rai. 


o-ntBa 


f-<r06 


o-vrai. 



fiai 



o-firjv 



Present Perfect, 
aai I rat. || iitQa j aOi 

Past Imperfect. 

s-<To, ov I £-T0. II o-fieOa \ e-ffOe 



firiv 



Past Perfect. 
TO. II fieOa 



(rOe 



I vrai. 



2. Subjunctive Mood. 
Imperfect. 
u)-fiaL J Ti'ffai, y \ ij-Tai. || oi-ynda \ T}-a9s | (o-vrai. 

3. Optative Mood. 
Imperfect and Future. 
oi-fiijv I oi-(TO,oi-o I oi-ro. II oL-jxeOa \ oi-crOe \ oi-vTo. 
N.B. The perfects of the subjunctive and optative are made by 
the perfect participle and the subjunctive and optative of eg. 



4. Imperative Mood. 
Imperfect. 



Singular. 
12 3 

£-(70, OV I £-(r9uj. 



Plural. 

2 3 

e-ffOe I i-<j9b)<Tav 
or i-aOtav. 



APPENDIX. 165 



Perfect. 
Singular. Plural. 



2 3 



1 2 3 

(T^e j (jOcjffav or 



5. Infinitives. 
AU but aorists and perfect, e-crOai. Perfect aOai. 

6. Participles (Crude Forms). 

All but aorists and perfect, o-fxevo (M. & N.), o-fieva (F.) 
Perfect, fievo and fieva. 



4. Terminations of the tenses^ Sec, peculiar to the 
Passive Voice. 

1. Indicative Mood. 

Futures Indefinite. 

Singular. Plural. 

1 2 3 1 2 3 

0-fji.ai I e-cai, I e-rai. o-jitQa I t-aQe j o-j/rat. 

I e-«^y I 1 I 

Aorists. 
n-v I »;-C I 7?. II 7;-/i6i/ I 77-rc | ri-aav. 

2. Subjunctive Mood. 
Aorists. 
w 1 ^i-e I y. II w-/x€v j ^-r£ I w-ai. 

3. Optative Mood. 
Futures Indefinite. 
oi-/iqv I oi-(ro,ot*o I oi-ro. H oi-ixiQa \ oi-dOe | oi-vro. 



166 APPENDIX. 



Aorists. 
Singular. Plural. 

1 2 3 

ei-T}-fxev I ei-i]-T€ \ n-ri-aav. 



1 2 3 

ti-ri-v J ii-ri-Q I £1-?;. 



4. Imperative Mood. 
Aorists. 
I ri-Qi I j;-rw. || . . | jy-re | -q-Tioaav. 

N.B. As the 1st aorist has the suffix Qr}, the termination Qi is 
in that tense changed into ti. 

5. Infinitives. 
Aorists, 'q-vai: Futures Indefinite, e-aOai, 

6. Participles (Crude Forms). 

Aorists, e-vT (M. & N.), et-(ra (F.). 

Futures Indefinite, o-fiivo (M. & N.), o-fieva (F.). 



5. Terminations of the tenses, ^c, peculiar to the 
Middle Voice. 

1. Indicative Mood. 
i^'iVs/ Aorist. 
Singular. Plural. 

12 3 12 3 

a-firjv I a-ffOf aOy I a-ro. a-fieOa I a-o-0£ | a-vro. 

I <^ I ! 

Second Aorist. 
o-firiv I e-(xo, eo, I e-ro. j[ o-}iiBa | e-cr06 | o-vto. 

2. Subjunctive Mood. 
(ti-fiai I j;-(rat, y | ri-rai. \\ u}-iis9a | jy-cr^e j cj-vrai. 



APPENDIX. 



167 



1 
ai-fiT]v 



3. Optative Mood. 
First Aorist. 
Singular. Plural. 



ai-(TO, 
ai-o 



3 

ai-TO. 



1 2 3 

ai-fieOa I ai-aOe I ai-vro. 



Second Aorist. 
oi-fii}v I oi-aOyOi-o I ot'TO. II oi-fieOa | oi-aOe 

4. Imperative Mood. 
i^ir«^ Aorist. 

a-aBix). II 



Second Aorist. 
e-<jB(j}. II 



a-(T06 



.(T0£ 



a-crOuxrav 
or a-aQ(av. 



s-(T9(t)ffav 
or e-(T9<i)v. 



5. Infinitives. 
1st Aorist, a-aQai. 2nd Aorist, e-aOai. 

6. Participles (Crude Forms). 
1st Aorist, a-fitvo (M. & N.), a-fitva (F.). 
2nd Aorist, o-/i£vo (M. & N.), o-fisva (¥.). 



6. Suffixes of the tenses. 

Future Imperfect (Active, Passive, and Middle), q. Verbs in 
X^ fi, V, p generally do not take g, but have person-endings con- 
tracted with f . 

1st Aorist (Active and Middle), aa. Verbs in \, {i, v, p add 
a only, and strengthen the vowel of the Crude Form. 

Present Perfect (Active), a, d, or ku. 

Past Perfect (Active), et or r] ; d or rj ; kh or kt}. 

Aorists (Passive), 1st Oij, 2nd r]. 

Futures Indefinite (Passive), 1st 9t]-(t, 2nd i/-(t. 



168 APPENDIX. ♦ 

Putxire Perfect (Passive and Middle), same as future imperfect 
active. 

No other tenses have suffixes, but are distinguished either by 
prefixes, or by the personal terminations. 



III. Verbs in MI. 



Remark 1. Verbs in jui (so called because the 1st person sin- 
gular of the pres. imperf. indie, act. ends in fii — the old termina- 
tion) are a class of verbs ending in a, f, i, o, or v, which generally 
form the present and past imperfect tenses of aU the voices, and 
the 2nd aorist active and middle, without connecting vowels: 
they differ also from the ordinary verbs in several other respects. 
Some verbs, most of which end in a consonant, are lengthened in 
the present by the addition of the syllable w, and they are, in 
that tense, declined like verbs in fii, but they have no 2nd aorist, 
nor do they take the prefix mentioned in Remark 2, 

Remark 2. In the present and past imperfect tenses they 
generally receive a prefix consisting of t, before which, in verbs 
beginning with a consonant, this consonant, or if it is an aspirate, 
the corresponding smooth letter, is repeated. To the roots e and 
(TTtty I only is prefixed witli the rough breathing (t). 

Remark 3. The following are the rules for the formation of 
these verbs in the active voice. 

1. Indicative. 
1. Present Imperfect. 

Singular. Plural. 

12 ^ 11 1 2 3 

Personal terminations \ /xi \ g \ <n. \\ fiev \ ts \ aai. 
In the singular the vowel of the Crude Form is lengthened 
before the personal terminations. 

2. Past Imperfect. 
The augment is regularly prefixed. 
Personal terminations | v | f | none. || fiiv \ rs \ aav. 



APPENDIX. ' 169 

The verbs Oe * put,' do 'give,' and e * send,' do not form then- 
singular number without connecting vowels, so that they have the 
regular terminations of contract verbs. 

Verbs increased with vv do not form the 1st person singular with- 
out a connecting vowel, and often have one in the 2nd and 3rd. 

As in the present, the vowel of the Crude Form remains short 
in the plural. 

3. Second Aorist. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. 2. 3. I 1. 2. 3. 

Personal terminations | J^ | C | none. |j fiev \ re | trav. 

The augment is prefixed in the regular way. 

In the plural as well as in the singular the vowel of the Crude 
Form is lengthened, except in the verbs 9t and do, which more- 
over, as well as k, have no singular in the 2nd aorist. 

2. Subjunctive. 
Imperfect and Second Aorist. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. 2. 3. w 1. 2. 3. 

Personal terminations | w | yc 1 V' \\ iJ^H-^v j ^^£ 1 wo't' 

The a and t of the Crude Forms are lost in the w and rj. But 
ow and otj are both contracted into a> ; as, 2nd aor. cw, d(^Q, d<^, 
diofiev, daJTS, doJai. 

3. Optative. 

Imperfect and Second Aorist. 

Personal terminations r Singular. Plural, 

with modal charac- J 1. 2. 3. ii 1. 2. 3. 

teristic L ir]-v | iij-g \ irj. \\ irj-fiev | irj-re | uj-aav. 

The vowels of the Crude Forms are not lengthened. In the 
plural the rj is often omitted in the 1st and 2nd persons, and con- 
sidered as contracted with the preceding diphthong. In the 3rd 
person plural most commonly rjcav is made ev : e.g. Sidol-fxev, 
hdol-Tt, didoX-ev. 

Q 



170 ' APPENDIX. 



4, Imperative. 
Imperfect and Second Aorist. 

Singxilar. Plural. 



r Smgxilar. 
I 1. 2. 3. 



Personal termina- I 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 

tions I , . I 01 I TO). . . \ Ts \ vTbJv, or rwaav 

III II {TiOv). 

In the imperfect the vowels of the Crude Forms remain short, 
and the 2nd person singular is rarely made in the regidar form : 
the termination is generally dropped, and the vowel of the Crude 
Form is contracted with the connecting vowel e ; e. g. o/ivv for 
ofiviiQi, lOTTj for i(TTa9i. 

In the 2nd aorist a is changed into rj, but £ and o remain un- 
changed. 

The Tense Forms 6e and £o and compounds of e change 9i 
into g. 

5. IXFINITIVE. 

Imperfect and Second Aorist. 
The suffix is -vat. 

In the imperfect the vowels of the Crude Forms remain short. 
In the 2nd aorist a becomes rj ; e, ei ; o, ov. 



6. Participles. 

Imperfect and Second Aorist. 

The suffix is vr (M. & N.), and the fem. is made by a further 
suffix era. 

The participles are regularly declined. 

Remark 4. The following are the rules for the formation of 
these verbs in the present and past imperfect passive and middle. 
The vowels of the Crude Forms are short throughout, except in 
the subjunctive. 

1. Indicative. 
The terminations for both tenses are the same as in the ordinary 
verbs. 



APPENDIX. 



171 



2. Subjunctive. 
The terminations are the same as in the ordinary verbs. 
Vide Remark on the subjunctive active. 



Personal endings 
with modal cha- 
racteristic 



3. Optative. 

Singular. 




Plural. 
1. 2. 3. 

i-fie9a I i-(jO( I L-vTO. 



4. Imperative. 

Singular. Plural. 

1. 2. 3. I 1. 2. 3. 

Personal endings | . . | c70 | (r9io. \ . . \ a9e \ a9wv or aOujaav. 

In the 2nd sing, the <r is omitted, and the ordinary contraction 
takes place. 

5. Participle. 
Suffix fievo (M. & N.), fieva (F.). 

6. IXFINITIVE. 

Suffix crOai. 

Remark 5. Second Aorist Middle. The suffixes are pre- 
cisely the same as in the tenses common to the passive and middle, 
the only distinction being, that the 2nd aorist middle is of course 
made from the simple root without the prefix. 



IV. — Formation of the other Tenses of 
Verbs in MI. 

Remark 1. With the following exceptions, these are formed 
regularly, as from verbs in a, e, o, andu. 

Remark 2. The aorist and future passive take a short vowel 
in the root throughout ; but the present and past perfect generally 
have it long. 



172 APPENDIX. 

Remark 3. The verbs 9e, e, and co have an irregular 1st 
aorist active made by the suffix ku ; but these forms are confined 
to the indicative mood. In consequence, probably, of their simi- 
larity to the present perfect, that tense in the verbs 9t and t 
changes the t into ei, instead of ?;, before the suffix Ka. 



VOCABULARY. 



REMARKS ON THE MODE OF USING THE 
VOCABULARY, ETC. 

1. When, as frequently happens, several Greek words are given 
for one English word, it is to be distinctly remembered that, as a 
general rule, they cannot be used indiscriminately in translating 
the exercises : before selecting any one of these words the pupil 
must consider, first, whether the form of the Greek word is such 
as to bring it under the rule to which the exercise he is translating 
belongs, or under any previous rule ; and, secondly, whether it 
bears the particular meaning attached to the English word which 
he is to translate, Thus, in any of the exercises previous to the 
seventeenth no substantive or adjective ending in a consonant can 
be used : in any previous to the twenty-sixth no middle verb is 
to be employed ; and so on with other classes of words. Again, 
suppose the English word is "fearful," for instance, the pupil 
must consider whether that word is, in the given instance, used in 
an active or in a passive sense, that is, whether it means ' 'dreadful , 
fear-causing," or " timid, subject to fear ;" because on this it de- 
pends which of two Greek words is to be employed. The neces- 
sary explanations on such points are in all cases given with the 
words in the Vocabulary, the meaning of the English words being 
explained by other words following them in parentheses. It can 
hardly be needful to add, that attention must of course be paid to 
the distinction between nouns and verbs, prepositions and adverbs, 
&c., when a word in English belongs to different parts of speech. 

Similarly, when the Crude Form of a vei'b is said to be used 
only in some particular tenses, care must be taken not to form 
from it any other tenses : this remark will often determine which 
of several Greek words is to be used. 
Q 2 



1 74 VOCABULARY. 

2. WTiere no mention is made of the gender of substantives, 
they are masculine, except in the following cases : 

Crude Forms ending in <Tvva, <n, or tijt are feminine ; those 
ending in jiiar are neuter. 

3. The comparative and superlative of adverbs are not given, as, 
in most cases, the former is expressed by the singular, the latter 
by the plural accusative of the neuter adjective in the comparative 
or superlative degree. 

4. When several English words in the exercises are to be ex- 
pressed by one Greek word, the rule generally adhered to has been 
to put down the principal word in its alphabetical place in the 
vocabulary : otherwise, to place the phrase according to the first 
letter of the first word in it : sometimes both plans have been ob- 
served ; thus " with the aid of" will be found twice in the voca- 
bulary ; once under the word ** aid," and again under " with." 

5. The following are the abbreviations used in the vocabulary. 

ace, accusative, "] used after Greek words to denote that such 

dat., dative, > words are followed by these cases of words 

gen., genitive, J dependent upon them. 

adv., adverb. 

c. (after a Greek adjective), common, i.e. having the same form 

for the feminine as for the masculine, 
comp., comparative, 
conj,, conjunction, 
f. (after a Greek noun), feminine. 
F. (after adjectives), feminine, 
in trans., intransitive. 
M. (after adjectives), masculine, 
m. (after a Greek verb), middle. 
N. (after adjectives), neuter. 
N.S. (after nouns), nominative singular, 
n. (after an English word), noun, 
n. (after a Greek noun), neuter, 
part., participle, 
plu. , plural — denotes that the Greek word is not to be used in 

the singular, 
prep., preposition, 
sing., singular, denotes that the Greek word is not to be used in 

the plural, 
sup., superlative, 
trans., transitive. 
V. (after an English word), verb. 



VOCABULARY. 175 

Greek letters in parentheses coming after the Crude Forms, de- 
note the Increased Forms. 

6. Some verb roots occur so frequently, either in their simple 
state, or in combination with prepositions, that it is of importance 
to know their principal Tense Forms ; the following is a list of such 
of them as are irregular, the prefixes belonging to the tenses in the 
indicative being in all cases given, as they are in the vocabulary also. 

ay ; 2nd aor. act. t]yay. 

aipt ; 2nd aor. formed from another root (tX) tiX. ; aor. pass. 

yptQr]. 
(Sa ((3aiv) ; fut. (3r](T(ofiai) ; 2nd aor. e(3rt. 
j8a\(\X) ; perf. act. jSejSXTjica ; perf. pass. jSejSX?; ; aor. pass. 

yev (yiyv) ; fut. ysvrja ; 1st perf. yeyevij ; 2nd perf. yeyova. 
do {diSoj) ; 1st aor. edojKa ; aor. pass. eSoOi] (vide appendix). 
£ * send ;' 1st aor. tjku ; perf. tl/ca (vide appendix). 
tpX, used only in pres. and past imperf. ; fut. (Xeva(oixai) ; 2nd 

aor. r]\9 ; perf. e\7]\v9a. 
e% ; fut. f ^ ; imperf. ei^ ; perf. ecrxrjKu; 2nd aor, ecr^ ; 1st aor. 

pass. f(T%£07/. 

Kpi {kdIv), perf. act. KSKpiKa ; perf. pass. KSKpi ; aor. pass. SKpiOr], 
KTSv (kteiv) ; 1st aor. act. eKrava ; 2nd aoi*. SKrav- ; perf. act. 

eKTova and t/cra/ca ; 1st aor. pass. tKTaOt]. 
Xaj3 (XajUjSai/) ; fut. Xjji//(oy^tat) ; 2nd aor. fXa/3 ; perf. eiXrjcpa ; 

perf. pass. eiXrjfB ; aor. pass. e\r}(p9rj. 
Xey ; perf. pass. XeXey ; in compounds, perf. act. eiXoxa • perf. 

pass. eiXfy. 
TEfx {rffiv) ; 2nd aor. act. fra/i- or tre/n- ; perf. act. TSTfxijKa ; 

aor. pass, er^rj^// ; perf. pass, tet^t}. 
Tsv (reiv) ; perf. act. re-TciKa ; perf. pass. Terd ; 1st aor. pass. 

ETuOlJ. 

Tpe(p ; fut. act. Ope^ ; 1st aor. act. eOpetpa ; perf. Tsrpocpa ; 1st 

aor. mid. eQpctpa- ; 2nd aor. pass, trpa^ij ; perf. pass. r£- 

6pa(p-. 
Tvx {Tvyx(iv) ; fut. act.r£u^(o/xai) ; perf. act. reTvxVK^^i 2nd 

aor. ervx-' 
(pep, used in some of the tenses only, the others being formed from 

various roots ; fut. act. oicr : 1st aor. act. rjveyKa ; 2nd aor. 

act. rjveyK ; perf. act. evrjvoxct ; fut. pass. oicrOrjcr, or €V£%- 

6i](T', 1st aor. r]vexOr] ; perf. evrjvey. 
(pvy {(psvy) ; fut. act. (piv%{oiiai) ; perf. Tre^evya ; 2nd aor. t(j>vy. 



176 



VOCABULARY. 



A. 

Ability, dvvam, f. 

Abie, iKcivo 

About (around), Trfpi, ace. 

About (nearly), afKpi, ace. 

About, be ; be going to ; be to, 

fieX (XX), followed by infin. 
Abstain, a7r-£%, m. 
Abundance, a-^9ov-ia, f. 
Accomplish, fcdra-Trpay (<T<r) 
According to, Kara, ace. 
Account of, on, cia, ace. 
Accuse, dia-l3a\ (XX) 
Accustom, £0i^(^) 
Acquainted with, tn-ireipo, gen. 
Acquire, Kva, m. 
Across, TTfjOa, Trepdv, gen. 
Act, TTjOay ((Tc), ttou 
Act unjustly, a-£iK6 
Action, epyo, n. 
Additional settler, ett-oiko 
Administer, diairpay {(T(t), m. 
Administer, Trpay 
Admire, OavfiaT (Z) 
Admit, ofio-Xoye, m. 
Advance, irpoa-fiaX (XX) 
Advise, cvfi-^ovKiv, $ov\ev, 

dat. of person, ace. of thing 
Advocate, avv-rjyopo 
Aegina, Aiylva, f. 
Aeneas, Aiveia 
Affair, Trpdyfiar 
Afflict, 7rXj;y (ttXt/o-ot) 
Afraid, be, Sei 

(pofSe, (passive) 

Afraid of, be, rpe, ace. 
After (time), fitra, ace. 
Again, avOig, ttoXiv 
Against, TrpoQ, tizL, ace. 
Agamemnon, Ayafxe/xvov 
Agesilaus, AyriaiKao 
Agriculture, yewpyia, f. 
Aid of, with the, aw, dat. 
All, iravT (M. &N.), irdaa (F.) 
All sorts of (adj.), Trafi-TroXXo 
Alliance, (rvfi-fia-xia, f. 



Allotted one, have, Xax (Xoy- 

Allow, ea 

Ally, <TVfjL-fiax-o 

Alms (literally pity), eXerifio- 

avva, sing. 
Alone, iiovo 

Along, (prep.) rrdpa., Kara, ace. 
Already, rjCij 

Also, Kai (stands second) 
Always, aei 
Ambassador, Trpec/Sewra in sing. 

irptcfjiv in plur. 
Among, iv, dat. 
Anchises, Ay^Tcra 
Anchor, ayKvpa, f. 
And, Kai 
Anger, opya, f. 
Animal, C^o, n. 
Annoyed at, be, x^^^'^^Q ^^p. 

(dat. or ace), axQ-{i), m. 

dat. 
Another, aXXo 
Answer, vide Reply 
Anxiety, jxepifiva, f. 
Any, 7-12^ (n. nom. sing., tl) 
Anything, neuter of tlv 
Apollo, AttoXXuiv 
Appear, (pav {<paiv) m. (aor. 

etpavrj) 
Apple, f.i)]Xo, n. 
Appoint, ray (era) 
Approach (v.), irap-iXO 
Approach (n.), s<p-oco, f. 
Arcadian, ApKad 
Ariaeus, Apiaio 
Arise, ysv, m. 
Arm (weapon), ottXo, n. 
Arm (v.), ottXic (Z) 
Arm oneself, t^-07rXid (2), m. 
Armament, oroXo 
Armenia, Apfxtvia, f. 
Army, arpdro, arpdria, f., 

arpdTtvfxaT 
Arrange, Koafit 
Arrive, a(p~iK (iKve), m. 
Arrow, To^ev/xaT 



VOCABULARY. 



177 



Artaxerxes, Apra^epKa 

Artist, rexvlTa 

As, ojg 

As if, cjg 

As-many-as, oao 

Ascend, dvd-f3a {(3aiv), (m. 

fut. j3r](T0fiai), with eif 
Ashamed, be, aia^vv (passive) 
Ask (inquire), tpojra 
Ask for, aLTS (2 ace.) * 
Ass. ovo 

Assemble (trans.) aOpoid (?) 
Assemble (intrans.), crvv-tXO 
Assembly, tKKXrjcrLa, f., ayopa, 

f. 
Assert, laxvpio (?), m. 
Assist, (rvfi-Trpaj 
Assistant, vTrrjpsTa 
Astonishment, strike with, fK- 

TrXrjy (ccr) 
At, irpog, tTTi, dat., when no 

motion is implied ; otherwise, 

irpoQ, fTTi, eiQ, with the ace. 
At the same time, djia (dat.) 
Athene (Minerva), AOrjva, f. 
Athenian, AOrjvaio 
Athens, A9r]va (plu.) 
Attack (n.), f7ri-0op-a, f. 
Attack (v.) ewL-cpep (m.), btti- 

KSi (m.) 
Attendant, virripiTa, irpoawoXo, 

OepUTTOVT 

Attica, AttIku, f. 
Aulis, AvXt.8, f. 
Avarice, TrXeovt^ia, f. 
Aware, be, fxaO (fiavOav) 
Away, be, aTr-tc 
Axle, a^ov 

B. 

Back (adv.), iraXiv 

Bad, Ka.Ko 

Banished, be, iK-Trer (iri-rrT), 

(perf. TTt-iTTuj-Ka) : (pvy 

(^evy) ace. 
Bank, high, oxBa,{. 
Barbarian, ^ap^apo 



Barbaric, f3apf3apiKo 

Barber, Kovpev (ef.) 

Bare, make, \plXo 

Base, aiaxpo 

Battle, fidxa, f. 

Be, £<T 

Be present, or here, Trdp-etr 

Bear (n.) apKTo, m. &f. 

Beast of burden, v7ro-^vyio, n. 

Beautiful, koXo 

Beauty, KaXXeg, n. 

Bee, fieXi<T(ra, f. 

Beech-tree, (ptfyo, f. 

Before (adv. time), Trpiv (av is 
added when Trpiv is used with 
the subjunctive 

Before (prep.), Trpo, gen. 

Beggar, ttt^xo 

Begin (at the beginning), apx, 
m. gen. 

Begin (do first or before an- 
other), apx (active) 

Beginning, apxa, f. 

Being (part.), ovt (M. & N.), 
ovaa (F.) 

Behold, 9eu)pe 

Believe, ttkttsv, dat. 

Benefit (v.) ojcpeXe 

Best, apicrro 

Better, afutvov 

Beware of, (pvXaK {(T(t), m. ace. 

Beyond, Trepa, f^w, gen. 

Bid, order, KeXev 

Bird, opvW or opvi 

Birth, yeveg, n. 

Bite (v.) SaK (drjK) 

Blame (v.), /tteyu^, m., dat. of 
person, ace. of thing 

Blow, (n.) TrXrjya, f. 

Boar, Kairpo 

Boast, (v.), £7r-fv%, m. 

Boat, ttXoio, n. 

Boeotia, Botwna, f. 

Bold, OappaXeo 

Boldly, yevvaiojg 

Bolt (n.), KXy9po, n. 

Book, ]8ij3\o, f. 



178 



VOCABULARY. 



Both — and, kul — /cai, re — 7f, 

re — Kai ; te is an enclitic. 
Both sides, from, tKarepixjOiv 
Boundary, dpo 
Bow (n.), To^o, n. 
Bowman, ro^ora 
Box, Kiara, f. 
Boy, Trai^ 

Brave, ayaQo, sup. apitrro 
Break, icar-ay, 2nd perf. fcar- 

eaya 
Break-up, dia-ff-rra (<t in perf.) 
Breast, fiaaro 
Breast-plate, 9o)paK 
Bride, vvfi<pa 
Bridge, yecpvpa, f. 
Bring, (pep, ico/ii^ (^) 
Bring in, ftcr-ay 
Bring up (rear), rpecp, fut. act. 

Ope-i//, fut. pass, regular 
Broad tvpv (M. & N.), evpeia 

(F.) 
Brother, aceX(f)0 
Build, iSpv 
Bull, ravpo 
Burn, Kai (pres. and past imp. 

all the other tenses, Kav) 
Burn down (or up), Kara-Kai 

(kuv) 
Bury, 9a<p (ttt) 
Bury with, (Tvv-9a<p (ttt) 
Bustard, cjTid, f. 
But, aXXa 
Buy, ayopad ('0 
By (after a passive verb, and 

before the word denoting the 

living agent), vtto, gen. 

C. 

Call (name or summon), KciXe 
(perf. KeKXijKa), e not length- 
ened in fut. and aor. 

Call-together, (rvy-KaXe 

CaU out, (pOeyy, m. 

Camel, KafxrjXoj f. 

Camp, crTpdroTredo, n. 

Canal, diujpvxt f. 



Captain, Xoxdyo 

Capture, XajS (Xri(3) 

Carduchian, Kapdovxo 

Care for, (ppovrid (?), gen. 

Carriage, ap[xdna^a, f. 

Carry, ^fp (used only in pres. 

and past, itnperf.) 
Carry, bring, ko/xiS (iC) 
Carry-off, dpirad (^) 
Carv5? yXvip 
Cast-lots, kXt]po, m. 
Castolus, KacTTojXo 
Catch (vide Take), Xa/3 {Xr^jS) 
Cattle, KTTjvsg, n. plu. 
Cave, avrpo, ainiXaio, n. 
Cease, Xj^y ; ttuv (m.), both 

followed by participle. 
Cerameicus, KepafJieiKo 
Certainly, StjXovoti 
Chariot, ci/xaKa, f. 
Charioteer, r/vioxo 
Chastise, KoXad (K) 
Cheerfully, rideujg 
Cheirisophus, Xeipi(To<j>o 
Cherry-tree, Kepdao, f. 
Child (correlative to parent),'. 

TeKvo, n. 
(correlative to adult), irai- 

Sio, n. 
Choose, ctLpe (m.), 2nd aor. aX 
Chosen, alpero 
Cilicia, KtXiKia 
Cilician (n.), KiXiic 
Cilician woman, KiXttro-a 
Circumstance, Trpdyfiar 
Citadel, UKpa, f. 
Citizen, TroXTra 
City, TToXi, f. 
Class (n.), Kdrd-Xoyo 
Clear (v.), Kdddp {aip) 
Clearchus, KXtapxo 
Clever, tTTi-arrifJiov 
Close-chariot, dpfxdfia^a, f. 
Closely, iyyvg, sup. tyyvrarw 
Clothing, £<t6t]t, f. 
Cohort, Xoxo 
Cold (adj.), xl^vxpo 



VOCABULARY. 



179 



Cold(n.), ■<pvx^Q,ri. 

Collect, ayep (up) (perf. Tjyrj- 

yepica), evv-ay (perf. ayr^- 

oxa), cfvX-Xey (perf. avv-ei- 

Xox") 
Colonist, aTT-oiKO 
Come, ?/K (no perf. or aor.) 
, e\9 (used only in 2nd 

aor.) 
, epx (m., used only in 

pres. and past imperf.) 
Come (arrive), a^i/c {lkvs), m. 
, irapd-ytv (yiyj^)? 

m. 
Come together, avv-eXO^ avv- 

Come to terms with, Kura-Xv, 

m., followed by Tvpog 
Command (v.), apx, gen. 

,77yf, m., dat. 

Commander, apxovr 
Commander of a village, kwju- 

apxa 
Commit (intrust), eiri-Tpi-K 
Communicate together, koivo, 

m. 
Compel, dvayKud (?) 
Complete (adj.), reXeio 
Completely, reXsMQ 
Conceal, Kpixp (ttt) 
Concede, avy-x(ope (gen.) 
Concerning, Trepi, gen. 
Conclude a truce, ctrivd, m. 

aor. e-<7'KU(T 
Confess, Ojuo-Xoyg, m. 
Confiscate, aTro-arjfiav {aiv), m. 
Conflict, dfiiXXa, f. 
Confusion, throw into, rdpax 

Conjecture, eiKao (0 

Conquer, v'lKa 

Conscious, be, avv-oi^a (perf. 
with pres. signification, fol- 
lowed by participle agreeing 
with the subject, and the dat. 
of the reflexive pronoun) 

Consent (n.), yvcjfia, f. 



Consider, vofiiS (?) 
Constitution, TroXlreia, f. 
Consult, liovXev, m. 
Consult with, (ru/x-jSovXav, m. 
Continue, ^ J a- ye J/, m., fut. dia- 

yevT](T 
Contribute, (TVfi-fSaX (XX), m- 
Contrive, firjxdva, m. 
Converse, ^la-Xey, ra., (aor. 

pass. Si'SiXexOn) dat. 
Copper-vessel, x(^XKu)fiaT 
Corinth, KopivOo 
Corinthian, Kopiv9io 
Corn, (tIto 
Correct (adj.) op9o 
Correctly, opOojg 
Couch, evva, f. 
Country, xwpa, f. 
Country, native, Trarpid, f. 
Courage, avSpuoTrjT 
Court of, at the, Trapa, dat. 
Cowardice, Kaicia, f. 
Cowardly, /ca/co 
Creditor, xP'n^Ta 
Credulous, evireifTTO (c.) 
Croesus, Kpotco 
Cross (v.), dia-(3a ((3aiv) 
Crow (n.), KopuK 
Crowd (n.), oxXo 
Crown (v.), ot£0 
Cruel, w/io 
Cure (v.), OtpcLTrev 
Cut, Kdrd-TEfi (rtjLtv.), (perf. 

TeTfir]-Ka, 2nd aor. trdfi) 

Cut-off, aTTO-TtfJ, 

Cut down, KCLTd-KOTT (r) 

Cut off, aTTO-KOTT (r) 

Cyrus, }Lvpo 

D. 

Damage, without doing, aaivuiq 
Damsel, Kopa (nom. in rji) 
Dancing (n.), opxr]QfJio 
Danger, Kivdvvo 
Dangerous, Kiv^vvixjoeg 
Danger, fond of, cpiXo-Kiv^vvo 
Danger, be in, or incur, Kivbvvtv 



180 



VOCABULARY. 



Darius, Adpeio 

Dark, crKOTaivo 

Daughter, Qvyartp ; vide p. 96. 

Day, vfifpa, f. 

Day-break, afxa ry rj^epq. 

Days of old, in the, TraXai (adv.) 

Dead, viKpo 

Dear, (fiko 

Death, Qavaro 

Death, putto, a7ro-a<pay (?or tt) 

Debtor, o0£iXfra 

Deceitful, doXepo 

Deceive, arraTa 

Deceive (disappoint) ipEvd, m. 

Declare, aTro-deiK 

Decree (v.), v^>70i^, m. 

Deep,/3a0y (M. & N.), (SaOua 

(F.) 
Deer, SopKao, f. 
Defeat (Iiterallycrush),(v.),0pai» 
Defence, UTro-Xoyia, f. 
Defend, afivv, dat. 
Defend oneself, <pvXaK {(T(t) 
Delay (v.), dia-Tpij3 (1/3) m. 
Deliberate, (iovXev, m. 
Delicious, tjdv (M.&N.), -^deia 

(F.) 
Delos, At]Xo, f. 
Delude, air-d^ (-a^KT/c) 
Demand (v.), aire 
Depart, aTro-xwpe 
Depopulate, fp?;/io 
Desert (n.), tprjixo, f. 
Deserter, avrofioXo 
Desire (v.), xpy^ (0 
Desire (n.), eiri-Bvuia, f. 
Despatch (v.), a7ro-o-r£\(\\) 
Destroy, <p9tp {eip) 
Devise, fSovXev 
Die, 6av {9vi](tk), fut, mid. 

perf. Te-9vr]ica, 2nd aor. aTr- 

E^av : — TfXtvra | 

Difficulty, a-TTopia, f. j 

Difficulty, with (adv.), wovijpojQ j 

Dig, op^x i'^^X I 

Diligent, CTrovdaio 

Diligently, awovdanog I 



Dinner, ^mrvo, n. 
Disciple, ixddi]Ta 
Discipline, ra^'t ( =ray-(n), f. 
Discourse (n.), Xoyo 
Disease, voao, f. 
Disgraceful, aio-xpo 
Dishonour (n.), a-Tifiia, f. 
Dishonour (v.), a-fiiia^{Z,) 
Dismount, Kara-^a {(Sulv) 
Displeased, be, ax^, aor. »jx^- 

Disposition, good, ev(pv'ia 

Dispute (v.) aix(j)i<rj3r]Te 

Distant, be, air-ex 

Distribute, ve/x 

Ditch, raippo, f. opvyfiar 

Do, TToie, Trpay {aa) 

Dog, Kvv, for nom. s. kvov 

Door, 0iipa, f. 

Double, ciTTO 

Doubt (n.), afi<pi-(3oX-ia, f. 

Doubt, be in, a-Trope 

Dove, TTtpidrepa, f. 

Draw up, ray ((r<r) 

Draw up opposite, avri-ray, or 

avri-7rapa-ray 
Draw up in order, avv-Tay 
Drawing up of troops (n.), ra^t 

(y<Ti) 
Dreadful, deivo 
Drink (n.) ttoto 
Drink up, sk-tto (for perfects 

and 1st aor. passive) 
Drown, Trvly 

Dry up, $?jpav ()it in perf. pass.) 
Dust, Kovia, f. 
Dwell, otK£ 



Each, eKUfTTO 
Eager, Trpo-9vp,o 
Eagerly, rrpoGvfKjjg 
Eagerness, TrpoBvfxia, f. 
Eagle, atTo 
Ear, wr (n.), N.S. ovg 
Earthquake, auafio 
Easily, p^Sicjg 



VOCABULARY. 



181 



Easy, p^dio, sup. paaro 
Education, TraiCeia, f. 
Egyptian, AiyvTrrio 
Egyptian, in (adv.), Atyurr- 

Either party, UaTtpo (plu.) 

Eldest, irpecriSvraTo 

Elephant, eXE(pavT 

Else (adj.), aXXo 

Embalm, rdplx^v 

Emerald, afidpaydo, f. 

Eminence, uKpo, n. 

Emulate, ^ijXo 

Encamp, (TrpdroTrthv, m. 

Encircle, (TTe<p 

End (cease), ttuv, m. 

Endeavour (v.), ireipa, m. 

Enemy (public), TroXt/Jiio 

Enemy (personal), exOpo 

Enquire, make enquiry, epojTa 

Enrage, opyi8 {'C), dat. 

Enrich, 7rXovri8 (^) 

Enrol, ey-ypaf 

Ensnare, ev-eSpev 

Enter, €/x-/3a {j3aiv). eLC-eXO 

(only as 2nd aor.) 
Entertain, ^evic (?) 
Entrails, iepo (n. plu.) 
Entrance, ei<T-oCo, f. 
Ephesus, E(pe(To 
Ephor (a Spartan magistrate), 

£0-OjOO 

Equal, ICO, bp.oio 
Equally, ofidXcog 
Equal in age, rjXlKiuJTa 
Escape, airo-dpa (diSpacTK), fut. 

mid. with a : airaXXay 
Escape the notice of, Xa9 (Xav- 

6av), ace. 
Estate, %WjOio, n. 
Euphrates, 'Ev<ppdTa 
E\irope, EujOWTra, f. 
Even (conj.), kui 
Evening, ^£tXa, f., ka7rtpa,i. 
Evident, ^?jXo, (pdvepo 
Evident, make, drjXo 
Evil (bad), kuko t 



Evil-doer, KUKOvpyo 
Examine, (XKOTrt ; (in the pas- 

sive) epsvva 
Exclude, uTT-eipy ; in perf. im- 

perat. a is inserted. 
Exhort, Trapd-KsXev, m. 
Exile (n.), (pavyovT 
Expect, eX-iS (?) 
Expect anxiously, K&pddoKe 
Expedition, oroXo, aTpdreia, f. 
Expedition, make an, arpdrev 
join in an, cv-arpdrtv 



Expelled, be, e/c-Trrw (for perfect) 
Expend, cdirdva 
Explain, ^rfXo ; <ppa8 (?) 
Extend, dvd-rev (perf. to) 
Eye, ocpBaXfio 

F. 
Faction, one of an opposite, 

avTi-ffra-ffiojTa 
Faithful, TTiaro 
Faithfulness, TTLdTO-rrjT 
Faithless, a-7n<jTo 
Fall (v.), 7rfr(7ri7rr) (perf. tttoj) 
False, }pevSeg 
Famished, X'lfiujSeg 
Far, fxuKpo 

Far as, as, fisxpL, gen. 
Farewell, (Uterally, rejoice) xdp 

(aip) 
Fare well, ev irpay 
Farm, xwpa, f. 
Farmer, yewpyo 
Fast (adv.), raxv, sup. Tdxi<TTa, 

comp. Qadcrov 
Father, Trarep ; vide p. 96 
Favourable, kuXo 
Fear (n.), ^o/3o 
Fear (v.), Seid^Se (dat) 
Fearful (timid), (bo^epo 
Fearful (dreadful), hivo 
Fearfully, deiviog 
Feed (v.), vsfx, m. 
Few, oXiyo, comp. fxtiov, sup. 

oXiyioTo : Travpo 
Field, aypo 



182 



VOCABULARy. 



Fierce, aypio 

Fight (v.), jwax, m. fut. and 

aor. with connecting vowel e 
Find, find out, evp («) (ewpio-fc) 

fut. pass., evpe9rj(T, 2nd aor. 

act. 
Fine, icaXo 
Finger, daKTvXo 
Finish (v.), reXevTa; rekf, perf. 

pass. rereXecr 
Fire, Trvp, n, 
Fii-e, set on, sfi-TrprjQ 
First, TrpujTO 
Fish (n.), ix9v 
Fisherman, aXiev (F) 
Fit, seem, coke, Sok for fat. and 

ist aor. 
Five, Trevre 

Fix, TTTJY 

Flatterer, koXclr 

Flee, flee from, cpvy (ev), fat. m. 

has 2nd perf. 
FHght, (pvya, f. 
Flower, avOeg, n. 
Flute, avXa, f. 
Fly (v.), Trer, m. fut. TrtTrja 

(ofiai), perf. TTtTrrT/fca, aor. 

mid. ETTTa- 
Follow, £7r, m. 2nd aor. ccttt ; 

augment u. dat. 
FoUow with, (rvv-ETT 
Folly, fiojpia, f. 
Fond of war, (pXXo-TroXsfio 
Fond of danger, <pXXo-Kivdvvo 
Fond of horses, (pXX-iTnro 
Foolish, a-vor]-TO, fiaraio 
Foot, TTod, N.S. TToug 
Footstep, txvec, n. 
For (towards) prep., eiq, ace. 
For (in behalf or in defence of) 

prep., vTTtp, TTspi, gen. 
For (on account of) prep., dia, 

ace. 
For death, fTrt 9avdT(^ 
For (conj.), yap ; never first in 

a sentence. 
Force (power), ^vfiafxi, f. 



Foreign soldier (mercenary). 

Formerly, TrpoaOev 
Fortification, epyj-iar 
Fortified, oxvpo 
Fountain, Kprjva, f. 
Four, Ttrrap (declinable) 
Four thousand, rerpa-Kiff-xi^i-o 
Fox, aXcj-SK, f. (7/ in N. S.) 
Free (v.), air-aXXay (era-), gen. 
Free (adj.), tXevOepo 
Friend, (plXo 
Frighten, (poj3e 
From, aTTo, sk, Tcapa, gen. 
Frontlet, 7rpo-/x£r-w7riCto, n. 
Fruit, KapTTO 
Fugitive, ^pdirtTa 
Full, fiearo, TrXrjpeg, gen. 
Fully (completely), ev-reXcog 
Furnish (afford), Trdp-ex 
Furnish (supply), Kard-tyKiva^ 
(0 

G. 

Gain possession of, /era, m. 

Garden, ktjtto 

Gardener, kjjttsv (F) 

Garment, i^iario, n. 

Garrison, (pvXdica, f. 

Gate, TTvXa, f. 

Gather, rrvX-Xsy 

Gather in (harvest), (rvy-KOfiie 

General (n.), arpdrrjyo 
Get possession of, kto, m. 
Get- wood, %vXiC (Z,), m. 
Get-away, dpa (oi-^pa-cr/c) 
Gift, dojpo, n. 
Gild (v.), xP^^o 
Girdle, Zwva, f. 
Girl, Kopa (nom. in 77) 
Give, ^0 (verb in /it, vide Ap- 
pendix) ; short in pass. aor. 
Give-up, irdpd-So, airo-Co 
Give-a-signal, arifxav {aiv) 
Glad, be dd (t)S), m. aor. 



i 



i 



VOCABULARY. 



183 



Gladly, r)h(0Q 

Go, I (a verb in fxi, vide Ap- 
pendix) 

Go-away, utt-i, air-eXO (only in 
2nd aor.) 

Go back, arro-vocTTe 

Go -forward, Trpo-i 

Go-before, irpo-epx, m. 

Go-up, dvd-jSa (/3aiv) 

Go-ofF, oix, m. 

Go (retire), x'^P^ 

Goat, aiy 

Goblet, £K-7r(t}-fiaT 

God, eeo 

Goddess, Ota 

Going, be (to do anything), fxeX 
(X\), followed by infin., ge- 
nerally the future 

Gold, xpi^co 

Golden, X|o{l(r£o 

Good, aydOo 

Good-fortune, ev-daifwvia, f. 

Good-disposition, ev-cpv'ia, f. 

Goods, xRVI^f^T (pl^O 

Government, apxoL, f. 

Gratify, x^P^^ (^)» ^^' ^^^' 

Great (size), fxtyaXo, fieya, vide 
Appendix 

Great (much), ttoXXo, ttoXv, 
vide Appendix 

Greater (size), fiei'Cov 

Greatly (adv.), fieya (with " in- 
jure," " benefit)," icrxvpiog 

Grecian, Greek, (adj.), "EXX;^- 

VIKO 

Grecian, Greek (n.) 'EWrjv 

Greece, 'EXXa^, f. 

Greek, in (adv.), 'EWrjvKTri 

Ground, ya, f. 

Guard (v.), (pvXaK (o-c) 

Guard, be on one's, (piiXaK (cc), 

m. 
Guard (n.), (pvXaK 
Guide (v.), r)ye,m. 
Guide (n.), ayojyev (F), rjye- 

fiov 
Guilt, airtafjLar 



H. 

Half, )]ni(rv (M. & N.), r]jiL<THa 
(F.) ; an adj. followed by the 
genitive of the noun with which 
it agrees in gender 

Hand, %fi|0, f. 

Hand, right, ^t^ta (x£tp under- 
stood) 

Happen, tvx (ruy^ai^), fol- 
lowed by participle 

Happy, evdaiixov (in comp. and 
sup. to- is inserted) 

Harangue (v.), ayopev 

Harbour (n.), XXjxev 

Hare, Xayw 

Harvest, Kap-rro 

Hasten, (nrevd 

Hastily, (nrovdaKjjQ 

Hated, be, arr-txQ (civ), passive 

Haughty, VTnpr]<pdvo 

Have, ex, fut. iC, 2nd aor. tax 
1st aor. pass. ttrx^Or} 

He, she, &c., avro, tKtivo, vide 
page 33 

Head, Ke<l)dXay f. 

Heal, UKE, f^-a/ce, m. perf. 

Hear, hear from, aKo{ov), fut. 

aKOvcr(onai), perf. uKTj-Koa ; 

<T inserted in perf. stnd aor. 

pass. gen. 
Heavy armed man, oTrXlra 
Height, ui/zj/Xo, n. 
Hellespont, 'EXXrjcnrovTO 
Hellespontiac, 'EXXTjairovriaKo 
Helmet, KpdvtQ, n. 
Hence, evrevQev 
Hera (Jimo), 'Rpa 
Herald, KrjpvK 
Here, tvQa, evQaci 
Hidden, KpvirTO 
Hide, Kpv(p (ttt) 
High, fiaKpo 
High bank, ox^a, f. 
Higher (adv.), avojrtpb) 
Hill, Xo^o 
Himself, &€., eavTo 



184 



VOCABULARY. 



Hinder, icmXv 

Hire, let for hire, fiiffOo 

Hire, take on, fii<r9o, vn. 

His, hers, &c., genitive of avTo 

or avra 
Historian, <7vyy patpev (F) 
Hit (a mark), rvx (T^wyx^^)' S^^* 
Hit (strike), jSaX (\X) 
Hither, tvOads 
Hold of, lay or take, Xa(5, m. 
Home, at, oikoi 
Honest, ayaOo, XRV^^'^'O 
Honour (n.), rlfxa, f. 
Honour (v.), rlfxa 
Honourable, KaXo, sup. koWkxto 
Honourably, KaXuJg 
Hope for, hope, eX-rrid (Z) 
Horn, KepcLT, n,, N.S. Kspag 
Horse, ltttto 
Horseman, iTr-mv (F) 
Horses, fond of, (plX-nnro 
House, oiKLu, f. 
Household, oiko 
How, oTTujg 
Hundred, eKarov 
Hunger, XT/xo 
Hunt, Orjpa, fut. sometimes 

mid. ; Gripev 
Huntsman, OrjpevTa 
Hurry, be in a (v.), (rirepx, m. 
Husbandman, yeojpyo 
Hystaspes, 'IVrao-Tra 

I. 

Idle, (ipyo, pd-9vfio 

If, 61 (with indie, and opt.) eav 

(with subj.) 
If, as, <jjg 
111, be, voae 
Image, slkov, f. 
Imitate, 'CijXo 
Immediately, evOvg 
Implant in, (pv-ev, dat. 
Imprison, de 
Impudent, av-aicsg 
In, ev, dat. 



Incur danger, KivSvvev 
Independence, avro-voji'ia, f. 
Induce, t%-ay 

Industrious, (plX-epyo, (nrovdaio 
Industry, airov^aiorriT, <ptXep' 

yia, f. 
Inflict, ev-TSv (reiv) 
Inimical, cx^po 
Injure, /3Xa/3 (ttt), adlKs 
Innumerable, av-dpWfirjTO (c.) 
Inquire, ttvO (nvvOav), m. 
Instil, 5/<-j3aX (XX), has 2nd aor. 

dat. 
Insult, vf3pid (0 
Intermission, without (adv. ), 

a-dLa-Xmr-TOjg 
Interpreter, kpfirivev (F) 
Interview, have an, Gvy-ytv, 

m. dat. 
Into, Eig, ace. 
Introduce, ua-ay 
Ionia, Ibivia, f. 
Iron (adj.), atSripeo 
Island, vTjcro, f. 
Islander, vqcriMra 

J. 

Join, join with, trvv-a^ (""r), 

dat. 
Judge (n.) (not legal), KpXra 
Judge (legal), riyefxov tov ciku- 

(TTTjpiOV 

Judge (v.), KpXv (Kplv) 
Juryman, cXKacrra 
Just (adv.), i]d)j 
Just (adj.), SiKaio 
Justice, CiKaLOffvva 
Justly, SiKaiojg 

K. 

Keep (support), rpt^ 
Keep (detain), Kur-ex 
KiU, KTSv (eLv), aTTO-KTiv, 2nd 

aor. act. e-KTav, aor. pass. 

t-KTa-Qt] 
Kind, tv-voo 
Kindness, tv-voia, f. 



VOCABULARY. 



185 



King, fSaaiXsv ( F) 

Kingly, (iaaXXeio 

Knife, jxaxaipa, f. 

Know, oUa, 2nd perf. used as 
imperf., derived from £i^,'see;' 
oWa, olaOa, oWe ; L(r[iev^ tare, 
ladai: ySei, past perf. used 
as past imperf. ySeiv or ydrj, 
ydiig and yCuaQa or r^drjcrOa, 
ydu or yCr] ; ydei/xev, ydeiTe, 
ydeffav ; fut. eia{ofxai) ; infi- 
nitive ei^evai ; participle £i^or 
(M. & N.) tidvia (F) (to be 
used in no other tenses in 
these exercises) 

Know (become acquainted with), 
yvu) (yi-yvoj-CFK), fut. yvui- 
(T(o/iai), aor. pass. eyvoJcrO)) 

Knowledge, f.7rL-aT7]-fxa, f. 

L. 

Labour (n.), ttovo 
Labour (v.), irove 
Lacedaemon, AaKsdaifiov, f. 
Lacedaemonian, AdKeSaifj-ovto 
Laconia, AuKOJviKa, f. 
Lady, SecrTvoiva (a in nom. and 

ace. sing.) 
Lamp, \afi7rad, f. 
Land, ya, i. 
Language, yXoxrca, f. 
Large, /xeyaXo, fieya, comp. 

fiei^ov, sup. fieyi(7T0 
Laugh (v.), ytXa (a in fut. and 

1st aor.) 
Laughter, ys\o>T 
Laurium, Aavpeio, n. 
Law, vo[j.o 

Law-giver, voixo-Qtra 
Lay waste, tprjixo 
Lay-hold-of, Xa/3, m. ace. 
Lead (v.), ay, 2nd aor. rjyay 
Lead-back, air-ay 
Lead-out, e?-ay 
Leaf, (pvWo, n. 
Learn, ^dO(e) (fiav6av)y fut. 

Hd9ri(T{ofiai) ; has 2nd aor. 



Learn (hear, receive informa- 
tion), TTvO {7rvv9av), m. has 
2nd aor. 

Leave, Xitt (Xenr), has 2n.d 
aor. 

Leave-behind, Kara-XiTT, vtto- 

XlTT 

Leave off (cease), XTjy ; followed 

by pai-ticiple 
Left (adj.), ev-wvvfio (Uterally, 

well named) 
Leg, (TKeXeg, n. 
Leisure (n.), (JxoXa, f. 
Leisure, be at, axoXad (?) 
Lemnos, Ai)jxvo, f. 
Leonidas, AtojvX^a 
Lest, HI) 
Lest (in order that not), iva 

M 
Let for hire, fxitrOo 
Letter, «7ri-crroXa, f. 
Liberty, eXevOspia^f. 
Lie, tell a, xj^evo, m. 
Life, j3io 

Limit (v.), opid (?) 
Lion, XeovT 
Live (v.), 'Ca 
Load (n.), (poprio, n. 
Lofty, v%pr}Xo 
Long, fiaKpo 
Long (of time), ttoXu 
Long-ago, irdXaL 
Long before, ttoXvv xpovov irpiv 

■n 

Longer, no, ovkstl 
Loquacious person, adoXeaxa 
Loosen, Xv 
Lose, a7ro-(3aX (Uterally, throw 

away) 
Loss, be at a, a-Trope 
Lot, gain by, Xax (Xayxav) 
Lot, assign by, KXrjpo 
Love (v.), ^IXe 
Luxury, x^i^*^? f. 
Lycian, Avkio 
Lydia, Avha, f. 
Lysander, AvaavOpo 

2 



186 



VOCABULARY. 



M. 

Machine, ii-qxava, f. 
Maintain, rptcp 
Maintenance, Tpo(pa, f. 
Make evident, C)]\o 
Make-terms with, Kard-Xv Ttpog 
Man (human being), avQpojTco 

(c.) 
Man (adult male) ,avsp, vide p , 9 6 
Man, old, yepovr 
Man, young, vedvia 
Many, ttoXXo, ttoXv, vide Ap- 
pendix 
Many, so, roaovro 
March (v.), crT-pareu, m. 
March (of an army), iropiv, m., 

aor. e-TTopev-Ori 
March (v.), eXa (eXavv) 
March (n.), rroptia, f. 
Mark (target), okotto 
Market-place, ayopa, f. 
Master (of a slave), deaTrora 
Master (of a scholar), dlcaaKoXo 
Meadow, Xeifiojv 
Mean (v.), OeX 
Meat (food), clro 
Mede, MtjCio 
Meet (fall in with), sv-tvx, 

avv-Tvx (rvyx^v) 
Meet (join), avfi-iiiy 
Megarian, Mtyapiv (F) 
Menon, Isltviiiv 
Merchandize, wvio, n. plu. 
Merchant, e/u-Tropo 
Messenger, ayytXo 
Messmate, (Tvv-rpdTreZo 
Mid, middle, midst, (adj.) /li£(to, 

used as a neut. noun 
Middle (of the body) (n.), 

OfKpdXo 
Miletus, yUXr]ro, f. 
Miletus, a person of, MiXrjcno 
Mingle with, /iiy (fiiypv), dat. 
Moderation, with, fxtrpiojQ 
Molossian, MoXoo-ffo 
Money, apyvpic, n., xpjjjuar, 

n. plu. 



Month, firjv 

Moi-e, (adj. comp. of many) 

irXiiov 
More (adv.), fidXXov 
Most (adj., sup. of many), 

TrXeicrro 
Most (adv.), fiaX-KTTa 
Mother, nrjrtp, vide p. 96 
Mount (v.), dvd-l3a {(3aiv) 
Mountain, opeg, n. 
Move, kTvs 

Much (adj.), TToXXo (vide many) 
Much (adv.), jxdXa 
Murder (v.), <povtv 
My, ifio 
Myself, ifiavTO 



Mysian, Mwco 



N. 

Narrow, otevo 

Nation, tQvig, n. 

Nautical, vuvtiko 

Naxos, Na^o, f. 

Near (prep.), eyyvg, gen. 

Near (adv.), TrXrjcnov 

Necessary, avayKaio 

Needle, pdfid, f. 

Neither — nor, ovrt — ovre 

Never, qvitote 

New, Kaivo 

Next (prep.), rrdpa, dat. 

Next (following), (adj.) vartpaio 

Night, vvKT, f. 

Nightingale, arj^ov (c), liter- 
ally, songster 

No, no one, ovhv (M. & N.) 
N. S. M. ovceig. ovdsfiia (F) 

No longer, ovksti 

Noblest, ap-KTTO 

Nobly, yevvaiiog 

Noise, Qopvfio 

Noon, south, /Li£<T-7?/ii/3pia, f. 

Nor, ovTt 

North (literally, a bear), apKTo 

Not, ov, before vowels ovk ; in 
many dependent sentences and 
in prohibitions, firi 



VOCABULARY. 



187 



Nothing, ov^tv 
Notice (v.), yvM (yi-yvw-cr/c) 
Notice, escape, XaO (XavOav) 
Now-then, wv ^r] 
Number of, to the, tiq, ace. 

O. 

O (interjection), w 

Oar, eperixo, n. 

Oath, opKO 

Obey, irXQ {ttuQ), m. dat. 

Oblige, x«p'^ (^)> D^« dat. 

Obliquely, tiq irXdyiov 

Observe, <TKoire 

Obtain, rvx (rwy%av) 

Occupy beforehand, Trpo^Kara- 

XdfS 
Offer (v.), eTT-ayyeX, (XX) m. 
Often, oftentimes, TroXXa-Kig 

(kiq means * times '). 
Oh, w 

Old-man, ytpovT 
Older, Trptd^vTspo 
Oldest, irpecrfSvTaTo 
Oligarchy, oXXy-apxia, f. 
On, tv, STTL, dat. 
On account of, dia, ace. 
Once, TTOTS 
One, h, (M. & N.) (N. S. M. 

e'lg), fiia (F.) 
One, some (a certain one), riv 
One another, aXXr]Xo (plu.) 
One of an opposite faction, 

avTi-(Tra-(n(x)Ta 
Open (v.), av-oiy 
Opportunity, Kaipo 
Opposite, opposed (prep.), 

Kara, ace. 
Oppress, Tried (?) 
Or, r/ 

Oracle, fiavreio, n. 
Orator, pijrop 
Orchomenus, Opxonevo 
Order (v.), KiXiv (for pass.) ; 

Trap-ayyfX (XX), dat. 
Order by a herald, KtjpvK (cty) 
Order that, in, iva, ottujq 



Organize, Kocrfie 

Ornament (n.), icofffio 

Orontes, Opovra 

Other, aXXo, vide p. 33 

Our, rfHf.Tf.po 

Out of, f^, £K, gen. 

Outside, t^u), gen. 

Over (above), tin, dat. 

Overtake, Kdra-XajS 

Own (adj.), expressed by the ge- 
nitive of the reflexive pronouns, 
which are composed of the 
personal pronouns and avro 

Owner, icvpio 

Ox, /3oF, N. (3ovg, G. (3ooq ; 
vide Appendix 

P. 

Pack up, pack up baggage, 

(TKfvaS ('C),m.', (Tv-(TKfvad,m. 
Palace, jSdaiXeio, n. plu. 
Palm-tree, ^oivik 
Parasang, (3*24 miles) irapa- 

aayy, f. 
Pardon (v.), (ruy-yvoj (yi-yvw- 

(Tk), dat. 
Park, irdpadfiffo 
Paros, Ilapo, f. 
Partridge, rrepdiK^ f. 
Party, either, (Kdrtpo, plu. 
Parysatis, IlapvcrariO 
Pasion, Ilacnojv 
Pass (n.), 7rdp-o8o, f. 
Pass over, dia-(Ba (fSaiv), perf. 

(Se-jSrj-Ka 
Pass by, irdp-fpx, m. 
Pausanias, Tlavaavia 
Pay (n.), iiiaQo 
Peace, eiprjva, f. 
Peacock, raw 
Pebble, \prj(j)o 

Peloponnesus, HeXo7rov-vr}(TO,(. 
Pelt, ftdX (XX) 
People, Srjjxo 
Perceive, aitrQ (aiaOap), m. 

(followed by participle) gen. 
Perfectly, rcXcwc 



188 



VOCABULARY. 



Perhaps, lacog 
Perish, oX, m. 
Permit, fa 
Persian (n.), Uepaa 
Persian (adj.), UepcriKo 
Persuade, nXO (TreiO) 
Phalanx, (paXayy, f. 
Phalynus, ^aXvvo 

Philip, ^iXlTTTTO 

Philosopher, (pX\o.(To(po 

Phrygia, ^pvyia, f. 

Phrygian, (ppvy 

Physician, idrpo 

Pick up, av-aipe 

Pierce, Trap {-rreip) 

Piracy, Xyariia, f. 

Pity (v.), oiKTip {up) 

Place (n,), x<^pio, n. 

Place (v.), KdQid {V) 

Plain (n.), irtdio, n. 

Plain (adj.), ca^ig 

Plainly, aatp^q 

Plan (n.), ISovXevfiar 

Plant (v.), (pvTsv 

Plant (n.), (pvro, n. 

Pleasant, i^dv (M. & N.), r'ldeia 
(F.), yXvKv (M. &N.), yXv- 
KEia (F.), comp. yXvKiov 

Pleased, be, ad {rjC), aor. vcrO)], 
dat. 



re, TTtoTo, n. 

Plethrum (100 feet), TrXeOpo, n. 

Plot (n.), e7n-(3ovXa, f. 

Plot against, e7ri-(3ovXsv, m., dat. 

Plunder (v.), oprrad (^), di-ap- 
~ad 

Polish (v.), EK-KciOap 

Porch, (TToa, f. (retains a) 

Possess (v.), KXrjpo, m. 

Possession of, get, K7a,m. 

Possible (adj.), dvvaTo 

Possible, be, t^-ea 

Post (v.), ray {aa) 

Powerful, dvvaTO 

Practise (v.), fieXera 

Praise (v.), aive (e not length- 
ened) 



Pray to, Trpocr-evx, ^- dat. 
Prefer, at|Of, m. followed by a vn, 

with the gen. (vide Choose) 
Preference to, in, avTi, gen. 
Preparations, make counter, 

avTi-irapa-UKivao (^) 
Prepare, Trapa-aicevad (^) 
Present, be, Trdp-ecr, dat. 
Present (adj.), irap-ovT 
Present (v.), Oojpe, m. ace. of 

thing, dat. of person 
Present (n.), ciopo, n. 
Preserve (v.), aujo (^) 
Press hard, iruc {I) 
Pretext, irpo-cpa-cn 
Prevent, KwiXv 
Priest, uptv (F) 
Prison, decrixojTripio, n. 
Prisoner, dec^wTa 
Prize, a9Xo, n. 
Proclaim, Ki]pvK {err) 
Procure, Kara-aKfvad (^) 
Promise (v.), Xey ; vtt-ktx 

(i(Txve) m. fut. VTTO^ffxrja, 

perf. vTr-eaxV} aor. vir-eaX' 

dat. 
Property, XPVH-"^''' (plu.) 
Prosperity, ev-e^ia, f. 
Prosperous, be, ev -rrpay {an) 
Provisions, STrirrjSeio (n. plu.) 
Provisions, lay in, iTri-mrid (^), 

m. 
Punish (by legal sentence), ^Tjyiuo 
Punish (chastise), KoXad {'0 
Punishment, 'Crjyua, f. 
Pupil, fjLdOrjTa 
Purify, KaOdp {aip) 
Pursue, duoK 
Put on, tv-dv 
Put to death, airo-acpdy (^ or 

tt) 
Pythagoras, HvOayopa 

Q. 

Queen, (idaXXiaaa, jSamXeia 
Quick, Tdxv, comp. Oaaaov or 
Taxiov 



VOCABULARY. 



189 



Quickly, raxv, raxsoig 
Quit, fcara-XiTT (Xeitt) 

R. 

Rank, ra^i, f. 
Rather than, avTi, gen. 
Ravenous, Xaifxapyo (c.) 
Reach (v.), a0-TK {iKve), m. with 

£tf and ace. 
Ready, be (i. e. be inclined), 

OtX, fut. ee\.r]<r 
Ready (adj.), eToifjio 
Rear-guard, OTricrQo-cpvXaK 
Rear (bring up), rpecp, fut. 

act. Opsxlj, perf. pass. rt-Opa^. 

6K-Tpe(j) 

Rebuild, av-oiKo-^ojxe 
Receive, \a/3 {XajxjSav) 
Receive, 8 ex, m. 
Recognize, yvio (yi-yvw-cr/c) 
Reconcile, tryv-aXXay {(T(t) 
Reconnoitre, o-Kfir (-Trr), m. 
Reduce to slavery, KaTa-dovXo 
Refugee, exile, <ptvyovT 
Register (v.), aTro-ypd<p 
Reign (v.), (idaXXtv 
Rejoice, x^p (x«*|o) f^^- X«'P»?<^ 
Related, be, Trpocr-TjK, dat. 
Remain, fiev 
Remember, ^va (jii-ixvrj-CK), 

m. 
Remind, ava-ixva, aor. av-efi- 

vr](ya 
Reply (v.), aiTO-KpXv {icplv), m. 
Reply (u.), OTTO-Kpt-cn 
Report (v.), ayyfX (XX), air- 

ayyeX 
Report (n.), Xoyo 
Reproach (v.), oveidLd (^), dat. 

of person, ace. of thing 
Repulse (v.),a/tui/, m. 
Require, aiTS, air-aire 
Resolve (v.), (iovXsv, m. 
Rest (v.), Rest themselves, irav, 

m., ava-irav, m. 
Rest (adj.), aXXo, vide p. 33 
Restore (call from exile), Kar-ay 



Restore (give back), airo-do 
Retire, x^pe 
Return (v.), airo-vo(TTS 
Reverence (v.), aids, m. aor. 

ydsadr) 
Revolt (v.), afaffTriK 
Reward (n.), yepdr, n. 
Rhodian, 'Po^to 
Rich, irXovaio 
Riches, ttXovto (sing.) 
Ride, eXa (tXavv), fut. cXaffw 
Ride away, air-sXa 
Ride by, irdp-iXa 
Right (opposed to left), 8b^io 
Right (hand), 8i%ia, f. 
River, ttotcl^o 
Road, b8o, f. 
Robber, Xycrra 
Robe, (TToXa, f. 
Rope, (jirapTO, n. 
Rose (n.), podo, n. 
Rot off, have, airo-GaTr (cr7/7r), 

has 2nd perf. 
Rouse up, t^-tyep {up) 

Rout (v.), TpiTC 

Row (disturbance), Kpavya, f. 

Rower, vTrrjpsTa 

Royal, /SacriXfio 

Rule (n,), KOLvov 

Rule (v.), apx 

Ruler, apxovT 

Run, Tptx (only in pres. and 

past imperf.) 
Run, 9t 

Run-away, aTro-dpa 
Run forward, rrpo-Tpex 
Running (n.), Spojxo 
Rush forward, opua, m. 



Sacred, iepo 

Sacrifice (v.), 9v 

Sacrifice (n.), Upo, n., 9vaia, f. 

Safe, (TWO 

Safely, a-(T<pdX(jjg, sup. a-atpd- 

Xtarara 
Safety, aojTripia, f. 



190 



VOCABULARY. 



Sail (v.), TrXf (ttXev in all tenses 

but pres. and past imperf.) 
Sail away, airo-TrXe 
Sail out, 6K-7rX£ 
Sail round, Trepi-TrXe 
Sailor, vav-Ta 
Sake of, for the, evsKa, gen. 
Same, the, ro avro, vide p. 33 
Same time, at the, aixa 
Samian, 'Eafiio 
Sapphire, (rainpeipo, f. 
Sardis, HapSi, plu. 
Satrap, a ar pair a 
Save (v.), ao}d {I) 
Save oneself, o-w^ (^), m. 
Say, Xey 

Scatter, cTKeBad, Sia-(TKedad 
Scent (n.), ocrfia, f. 

Scout, (TKOXO 

Scythe, SpeTvavo, n. 

Sea, OaXaTra, f. 

Sea-fight (properly, ship-^ght) 

vav-fiax-ia, f. 
Sea-shore, uktu, f. 
Season, (hpa, f. 
See, 6pa, perf. kuipdKa (no aor. 

nor fut.) ; i^(used in 2nd aor. 

only) ; oir, m. used in fut. 
Seed, (XTrepfiaT 
Seek for, trjre 
Seem, seem fit, doKS or doK 
Seer, fiavTi 
Sell, TTpa {jn-Trpa-OK) 
Sell (offer for sale), ttwXc 
Send, irefXTT, (used only in pres. 

and past imperf. and fut. 

The 2nd perf. ire-iroiKpa is 

used only in late writers) 
Send out, SK-TrefXTr 
Send for, /xtra-Tre/XTr, m. ace. 
Send secretly, vTro-TrtfiTr 
Send with, avji-trenTV 
Send, (TTtk (XX) 
Send away, aTro-orcX 
Sentence against, pass, kcltol- 

■ilyr]<pLd CO, m. gen. of person, 

ace. of thing 



Servant, BtpaTzovT 

Serve (v.), vTnjpsTe, dat. 

Set sail, av-ay 

Settler, additional, stt-oiko 

Seuthes, "SevOa 

Seven, e-n-ra (indeclinable) 

Severe (literally, heavy) (3apv 
(M. & N.), (Sapeia, (F.) ; 
%aX£7ro 

Severely, [3apsu)£ 

Sew, pd(p (ttt) 

Shake (v.), o-ft 

Share (v.), koivo, m. 

Share (n.), iJ-speg, n. 

Sharp, o^'j (M. &N.), o^sia (F.) 

Sheep, 01, f., contracted into ol ; 
N., v., and A. plu. olg 

Shepherd, Troifxev 

Shew, (pav {(paiv) 

Shield, TreXra, f., acTTrid, f. 

Shield-bearer, TreXraora 

Ship, vaP or vav, f. (vide Ap- 
pendix) 

Shoot (with a bow), to^£v 

Shop-keeper, KairriXo 

Shout (v.), Kpay (2) (has 2nd 
aor. and 2nd perf.) 

Shouting (n.), Kpavya, f. 

Show-off, fTTt-^et/f, m. 

Shut, k\h 

Shut out, aTTo-Kku 

Shut up, Kard-Kku 

Shut (a book), crvfi-Trrvy {aa) 

Side of, by the, ivdpd, dat. 

Side, on the other, irtpa, iripav 

Sight (n.), QtdfiaT 

Signal, give a, crjuav {aiv) 

Signify, crijvav, or dia-ctjuav 

Silent, be, anoira 

Silver (n.), apyvpo, n. 

Silver (adj.), apyvpeo 

Sink (v.), Kard-dv, m. 

Sister, a3e\<pa 

Skilful, eixTTSLpo (gen.), iKdvo 

Slaughter (v.), airo-acpay (^ or 
rr) 

Slave, dovKo 



VOCABULARY. 



191 



Slavery, dovXfia, f. 

Slay, (T(pay (^ or tt) 

Sleep (v.), KaO-evd, fut. evdrja 

Slinger, acpevdovrjra 

Slow, (3pacv (M. & N.), /3pa^ 

Seia (F.) (comp. and sup. 

both ways) 
Slowly, fSpddeujg 
Small, fxiKpio 
Smoke, KaTrvo 
Snail, KoxKo 
Snow, Xiov, f. 
So (adv.), ovT(jj, ovT(t)g 
So many, toitovto 
So that, wore 
Socrates, "So^Kpareg 
Soldier, (jrpdridJTa 
Some (indefinite pron.) rij^, N. 

S. Tig (M. & F.) ri (N.) 
Some one, tlv 
Sometimes, svlots 
Son, vin 

Soon (adv.), evOv, ev9vg 
Sooner, TvpoaQtv 
Sore (n.), eKKsg, n. 
Sorrow, aXyeg, n. 
South (literally, mid-day), fie- 

(Tr/fjifSpia, f. 
Sow (v.), (TTTsp {eip) 
Spare (v.), 0i5 (st^), ni. gen. 
Sparta, 2 Trap ra, f. 
Speak, Xey 

Speak with, ^la-Xey, m. 
Spear, Xoyxa, f. 
Speed, at the top of, ava Kpa- 

Tog 
Speedily, rdx^^t^Q 
Spend (time), dia-TpX(3 (7/3) 
Spin out (time), di-ay 
Splendour, XafjnrpoTrjr 
Spoil (v.), 00f|O (eip) 
Spread, (nrtp (has 2nd aor. 

pass.), dia-airfp 
Spur (v.), vvy {aa) 
Staff, pa^^o, f. 

Stage (resting-place), CTa-Ofio 
Standard, arifxtio, n. 



State (community), TroXt, f. 

Station, totto 

Statue, avdpiavT 

Stay, fjiev 

Steal, fcXcTT (ttt), has both 1st 

and 2nd aor. pass. 
Steep, opOio 
Steward, Tcifiia 
StiU (adv.), sTi 
Stolen, tcXtTTTO 
Stone, XWo, m. 
Stone, precious, XX9o, f. 
Stop (v.) (put a stop to), TTav 
Stop (cease moving), Kara-Xv 
Storm, x^i^^v 
Stranger, tevo 
Strike, tvtt (ttt) ; Trai ; (with 

any thing thrown), (3aX (XX) 
Strike with astonishment, 6k- 

7rX//y ((X(r) 
Strip (v.), t//IXo, ace. and gen. 
Strong (fortified), icrxvpo 
Strongest, best, Kpar-iaro 
Sudden, on a, i^ a-irpocT-doKr]- 

TOV 

Sufficient, apKovvr 

Suggest, vTT-ay, m. 

Suitable, iKavo 

Summon, fcaXe, £ retained ; avX- 

Xcy 
Sun, 77X10 
Supper, dopTTO, n. 
Supperless, a-Senrvo 
Surmount, dia-Trepa 
Surround, kvkXo 
Survey (v.), Oewpe 

Suspect, VTr-OTTTEV, VTTO-VOS. 

Swear, ojxvv 

Sweet, i]Cv (M. &N.), -qhta (F.) 

Swift, doo, To-x^ 

Sword, gi0o 

T. 

Table, rpaTre^a, f. 
Tactics, ra^t, f. plu. 
Take, XdjS {Xajx^av ; Long 
Form, XjjjS) 



192 



VOCABULARY. 



Take place, happen, ytv (ytyi^), 
m. 

Take out, i^-aipt 

Talk (v.), XaXf 

Taochian, Tao%o 

Tardiness, l3pdSvTT]T 

Tarsi, Tap(To, plu. 

Taste (v.), ytv, m. gen. ; a in- 
serted in perf. 

Tax-gatherer, TE\o)va 

Teach, Sax (^r ^i^«x)> {SXdaaK) 
perf. act. dedcSaxa ; iraiStv, 
with two accusatives. 

Teacher, dldaffKoXo 

Tegea, Teyea, f. 

Tegeans, Teytara 

TeU, \ey 

Tell-beforehand, 7rpo-\ey 

Temple, vao (Attic, vsu)), iepo, n. 

Ten, SsKa, indeclinable 

Ten thousand, [xvpLo (adj.) 

Tent, (TKriva, f. 

Terms, make, KUTa-Xv 

Than, r/ 

That (conj.), on — when the de- 
pendent sentence is the object 
of the principal verb 

That (conj.), fjirj — when the 
principal verb implies fear, 
soUcitude. or uncertainty 

That (pron.), e/ceivo (neut. sing, 
nom. and ace. have no suffix) 

The, TO (M. &N.), ra (F.) 

Thebes, e»7/3a, f. (plu.) 

Then-indeed, ron dij 

Then, evOadr] 

There, tKti, ev9a 

Therefore, ovv (cannot stand 
first) 

Thessaly, OsTraXia, f. 

Thick (close), ttvkvo 

Thief, KXsTTTa 

Thigh, fiTjpo 

Think, vofiid (?) 

Thirsty, Si-^atvT (the superlative 
is to be expressed by the ad- 
verb naXiGTo) 



This, TovTo (see p. 33), ro-^f {to 

is the article) 
Thorn, uKavOa, f. (a retained in 

nom. and ace. sing.) 
Thou, (TV (see page 1) 
Thousand; xlXto (plu. adj.) 
Thracian, Qpaic 
Three, rpt 
Three thousand, rpia-xlXio 

(adj.) ^ 
Throat, Xapvyy 
Throne, Opovo 
Through, Sia, gen. 
Through (on account of), dia, 

ace. 
Throw, j8aX (XX), pnr (ttt) 
Throw away, airo^aX 
Throw into (e. g. prison), f/i- 

/3aX (perf. j3e-[3\r)-Ka) 
Throw into confusion, rapax 

((7(7) ^ 
Thus, OVTOJ, OVTb}Q 

Thyself, aavTO 
Tigres (river), TiypTjr 

TiU (prep.), /itxpt, gen. 

Timber, ^yXo, n. plu. 

Time, xpo^o 

Time of, in the, etti, gen. 

Time (season), ojpa, f. 

Time, in (opportunely), tv icatpy 

Tired, be, air-ayoptv 

Tissaphernes, TiaaatpipvtQ 

To (with motion), irpog, C7rt, hq, 

with ace. 
To be (infinitive), eivai 
To the number of, hq, ace. 
Together, afia, dat. 
To-morrow, avpiov, adv. 
Tongue, yXojacra, f. 
Too, Ts (enclitic) 
Too-severely, <j^oSpa 
Top, aKjOO, n. 
Towards, irpoq, ace. 
Towar, Trvpyo 
Town, TToXi, f. 
Townspeople, TroXIra 
Track, ixv^Q* n. 



VOCABULARY. 



193 



Traitor, irpo^ora 

Transact, Trpay {(T(t) 

Traveller, oSlra 

Treachery, irpoSoaia, f. 

Treasure, 9ri(Tavpo 

Tree, SevdpOj n. 

Trial, aycjv 

Troops, dvvafii, f. sing. 

Trouble (n.), ai/ia, f. 

Truce, aTrovda, f. plu. 

Truce, make or conclude a, 

airev^, m. aor. i.-aTTiiaa 
True, aXrjOeg 
Truly, akr]dix)Q 
Trumpet, caXiriyy, f. 
Trumpeter, craXTrtyKra 
Trust (confide in), iriaTtv, 

dat. 
Turn, rptTT, perf. act. Ttrpocpa 

or TiTpa^a 
Turn away, aTro-rpeir 
Turn over, tiri-TptTr 
Turn, orpf^ (aor. pass, with 

intransitive signification) 
Twist round, arpt^ 
Two, Svo 

Two himdred, diuKocrio (adj.) 
Tyrant, rvpavvo 

U. 

Under, utto, dat. 
Unfaithfulness, a-iriaTia, f. 
Unfasten, xaXa 
Unfortunate, ^vcr-rux-tt 
Unjust, a-SlKO 
Unjustly, act, a-SXKe 
Unless, ft jut;, iav [xr] 
Unprepared, a-Trdpa-CKtvaoTO 
Unpunished, a-Z,i]iiio 
Until (prep. ),/i£xpt (withnoun), 

(conj.) fi^xpi avy kujg av (with 

subj. and opt.) 
Unwilling, ukovt 
Up (prep.), dva, ace. 
Up to, Trpog, ace. 
Upon, £7rt, dat., tig, ace. 
Upper chamber, avioyttn, n. 



Use, make use of, xp"? "3. dat. 
Useful, xp^(^^f^o 



Valour, apera, f. 
Valuable, a^io 
Very (adv.), crcpodpa, fiaXa 
Very (adj.), avro 
Vessel, ttXoio, n. 
Vessel, copper, x«XKw/Ltar 
Victim, <T(pdyto, n. 
Village, KMfxa, f. 
Villain, KCLKovpyo 
Villainy, KuKovpyia, f. 
Vine, tt/XTTfXo, f. 
Vineyard, afiirtXiov 
Violate, Xw 
Violent, x«Xf7ro 
Virgin, -KapQtvo 
Virtue, apera, f. 
Voice, (pMva, f. 
Voracious, Xaiixapyo 
Vow (v.), ewx, m. 

W. 

Wage war, go to war, no- 

Xsfxe 
Waggon, dfia^a, f. 
Wait, fxev 

Wait for, irtpi-iitv, ace. 
Walk (v.), j8a5i5 (?) 
Want, be in, (nrdvid {Z) 
War (n.), iroXefio 
War (adj.), woXtfiiKo 
War, make or wage, iroXtfie 
War-like, TroXf/uiKO 
Wai-d-off, rt/xiJv (vv) 
Wares, (ovlo, n. plu. 
Watch (v.), (pvXdK {<t<t) 
Way, odo, f. 
We, rfp.f.iQ, vide p. 1. 
Weakness, a-aOtv-aa, f. 
Weary (adj.), KcifidTripo 
Weigh (raise — an anchor), dva 

aira 
Weep, SaKpv 
WeU (adv.), uj 



194 



VOCAEULARY. 



Well-girt, iv-Z,(jjvo 

Wet (v.), liptx 

What, 6 (n.) ; in questions, n ; in 
dependent interrogatory sen- 
tences, 6,Tl 

When {at the time when), orf 

When {after the time when), 
67rfi, ETreidrj 

When, e-rreidav, (with subj.) 

Whence, evOev 

Whenevei*, tTretdav, oTrorav 

Where, ev9a 

Where (in dependent interro- 
gatory sentences), ottov 

Whether — or, Trortpov — rj 

Whether (if), n 

Which, 6 (M. & N.), a (F.), 
(vide p. 33) 

While, Whilst, tcog, kxts ; av is 
added when the subjunctive 
is used. 

Whither ? ttoI ; in dependent 
sentences, ottoi 

Who, 6 (M. & N.) a (F.) (vide 
p. 33) 

Who ? Tiv 

Whole, All, TravT (M. & N.), 
Traca (F.) 

Wife, yvvaiK, N. S. yvvr] 

Wild, aypLO 

Wild-beast, Orjpio, n. 

Willing (adj.), Uovt (M. & N.), 
EKovcra (F.) 

WilHng, be, eOeX 

Win (a battle), vIku 

Wind, avefio 

Wine, oivo 

Wing (of an army), Ktpar, n. 

Winter-quarters, %€t/ia^fo, n. 
plu. 

Wisdom, (TO(pia, f. 

Wise, cFOipo 

Wish (n.), (SovXrjfxoT 



Wish (v.), OeX, (3ov\, m. fut. 

(3ov\r](x, aor. efSovXijOri 
With, With the aid of, aw, dat. 
With (in the phrase ' with flutes, ' ) 

fxsra, gen. 
Within, tKTit), gen. 
Without, avtv, gen. 
Witness (n.), fxaprvp 
Wolf, XvKO 
Woman, yvvaiK, N. S. yvvr}', 

Voc. yvvai 
Woman's (adj.), yyyaiKfto 
Wonder (v.), QavixuT (?), fut. 

mid. 
Wonder at, Qaviiar, gen. 
Wonderful, Qavp,aaTO 
Wood {not timber), vXa, f. 
Wood, get (v.), 'ivXi5 (?), m. 
Wooden, ^vXlvo 
Woodman, yXo-rofio 
Word, tTTSQ, n. 
Work (n.), epyo, n. 
Work (v.), epyad (^), m. 
Workman, epyara 
Worthy, a^io 
Worthy to be general (adj.), 

a^io-arparriyo 

Wound (v.), Tpb) {Tl-Tpixi-GK) 

Wound (n.), rpavfJiaT 
Wreath (n.), art^dvo 
Write, ypa(p 
Wrong (v.), a-SlKS 

X. 

Xenias, Stvia 
Xenophon, Ssvocjxijvt 



Ye, v/xeLQ (vide p. 1) 

Yet, cTt, evOvg 

Young, veo 

Young man, Youth, vedvia 



INDEX OF THE RULES OF SYNTAX. 



n after the number of the page denotes that the Rule is 
in a Note. 

PAGE 

Absolute Case . . . . . . . , . . . . 82 

Aorist, when used . , . . . . . . . . . . 40 

Aorist sometimes translated by English Present Perfect 41 n. 

Aorist Subjunctive, when used instead of Imperative . . 63 

Aorist Imperative, when used . . . . . . . . 72 

Aorist Infinitive, when used . , . . . . . . 77 

Dative used to denote the Instrument . . . . . . 26 n. 

Duration of Time, how expressed . . . . . . 34 n. 

Future Optative, when used . . . . . . . . 69 

Future Perfect Passive, its meaning . . . . . . 115 

Hypothetical Sentences, how expressed in Greek 65, 66 n. 

Imperative Perfect Passive, its meaning . . . . 131 

Indicative, when used . . . . . . . . . . 19 

Infinitive, how employed as a Noun . . . . . . 74 

Infinitive Imperfect, when used . . . . . . . . 77 

Limiting "Words put in the Accusative . . . . . . 56 

Mj;, when used instead of ort . . . . . . . . 66 n. 

Middle Verbs, their Significations . . . . . . 89 

Neuter Plural Nominatives with Singular Verbs . . 5 n. 

Optative Tenses, when used . . . . . . . . 65 

Participles, use of . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 

Participle Future, use of . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Past Imperfect, when used . . . . . . . . 35 

Perfect, Present, when used . . . . . . . . 51 



96 



INDEX OF THE RULES OF SYNTAX. 



Present Imperfect Subjunctive, when used 
Present Imperative, when used . . 
Position of the Verb tcr 

Pronouns, Personal, their Nominatives rarely used 
Relative Words, how used with the Subjunctive 
Relative Clauses often expressed by Participles . . 
Subjunctive and Optative Tenses, when used . . 
Subjunctive Tenses, when used , . 



PAGE 

61 
71 

2n. 

2n. 
61 n. 
80 
59 
60 



THE END. 



Priatcdby J.&. H.Cox, Brothers (late Cox & Sons), 
74 & 75, Great Queen Street, Lincoln's-Inn Fields. 



•■•••...• >..•■•-•.<» ^."W^ - 



y^,..f\y -4.. 



s^X-^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X-^X^X^X-^iX' 




C¥X^X^X¥X^X¥X^X¥X¥X^X¥v^v^v^>:r« 

si"X¥XWX¥XWX^X^X¥X¥X¥XWX¥X'^XWx^'' 

(^x^x^xwx^x^x^x^x^x^'^^^v^x^^iV^y^ 

^X¥X¥X^X¥X^X^X^X^X^XWX¥V^V¥V^: 

c^x-^x^x^xwx^x^x^x^x^x^x^x^x^x^ 
?X¥x;^xwxwx^x^x¥x^x¥X¥x^x^x^xW!; 
c^x^x^x-^x^xwxwx^x^xWxWx^x^xw 

(X^X^X¥X¥X^X^"X¥X¥X¥X-^X^X^XWX'^^ 
("•^X^X^X^X^X^X^XWXWX-^X^XWX^XWX^ 
<X^X¥X¥X¥X«^X¥X^X¥X¥XWX¥XWX^X-^") 
C^X^X¥XWX¥X¥XWX¥X¥XWXWX¥X^X^X^ 

^x-^x-^x^x^x^x-^x^xwx^x^xwxWxWxW) 

(^X^X¥X¥X¥X¥X¥X^X¥XWX^X^XWX¥X? 
^X^"XWX^XWX¥X^X¥X^X^X¥X¥X^XWX^i 

^^x^X¥xwx¥xWx^xWxWxWxWxWx¥xWx^ 
^x^xwx^xwx^x-^x^xWx^x^xwxWx^x^) 

^¥X¥X¥X¥XWXWX¥X^X^X^XWX¥XWX¥X^ 

^x^x;^x¥X¥x^x¥X¥x^X!^x^x^xWx^xW) 

<^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^<^X^X^X^X^X) 
C^X¥X^X^"X¥X¥XWX^X¥X^XWX^X^X¥X^ 

^x^X'^x^x'^xWxWx^xWx^xWx^xwx^x^) 

<^¥X¥X^XWX¥X^X^X^X^X^'X^X¥XWX^X^ 

^XWX¥XWxWxWX^XWXWX¥X^X^X¥X^X 

<WX¥X^X¥XWX¥X¥X¥X^X^X^X¥X^XWX> 

^X^X¥X^X^X^X¥X¥X¥X¥X^X¥X¥X^X¥) 

<!^X¥X¥XWX^X^X^X¥X^XWX^XWX¥X^X^ 

^X¥XWX^XWxWxWX¥XWX¥X¥X¥X^X^ 

<^x^x}^x;^x^x^x^xi^x^x;^xj^xi^xi^x^x) 
^fWx^xWxWx^xwxWx-^x^x^x^x 

^X¥X¥X^X¥X¥X¥XWxWX¥XWX'^X^X¥XWx 
<^X)^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X»<^X^X^ 
^X^X^X¥X^X¥X¥X¥X^X¥X¥X)^X^X^X^: 
<^X^X¥X¥X^X¥X¥XWX¥XWX¥X^X^X¥X^ 

^x^x^x^x^x^xwx^x^x^x-^x^xwxwx^ 

<^X^X^X¥X^X^X^X¥X^X^X^X^X^X^D<- 
^X¥XWX^X¥X¥X^X¥X^X¥X)^X^X^X^X¥- 

^X^X¥X¥XWXWX^X^X^X WX^XWX¥X^X^' j 




C^<¥X^X^X^X^X^X^XWX¥X¥X^X'^X^X^ 

><^X¥X¥X¥X)^X¥X^ 

^XWX^D<^X^X^fX¥X^D<¥X^X^X^X¥X¥X^ 



M.^N.^<>!(X'*D<ii«(X>i'.x-. 




SCHOOL BOOKS 



DIOTlONARy OF GREEK AND KOMA^ AiNTlQUITlES. By 
various Contributors. Edited by Dr. W. S>uth. Ilu'stiiated 
By :»ANY HUNDRED ExGRANiNus ON WooD. 2nd edition^ revised 
and tnlargeJ. 1 vol. 8vo., 42s. cloth lettered. 

DICTIOXAKY OF GREEK AND ROMAN BIOGRAPHY AND 
aiYTIlOLOGY. By various Contributors. Edited by Dr. W. 
Smith. Illustrated bv engravings on Wood. 3 vols. 8vo. o/. los. (id. 
Vob. I. and II., each"l/. Itl*. Vol. III., 21. 3s. Gd. cloth lettered. 

NEW GREEK DELECTUS; Sentences for Translation from Greek 
into English, aud from English into Greek, arranged in a sy.steniatic 
Progre.ssion. (By Dr. Rapijlvel Kuhner.) Translated and Edited 
from the German. ByDr. Aulen. 7'hiTdedition,recisvd. Tinio. i-s. 

NEW LATIN DELECTUS: upon the same plan as the Greek. 15y 
Dr. Aixex. Third edition, revised. 12mo. 4». 

CONSTRUCTIVE GREEK EXERCISES, for teaching Greek from 
the beginning by Writing. By Dr. Allen. Second edition, muck 
improved. l2mo. 5«. 

ECLOG.E CICERONIANiE; Selections from the Works of Cicero. 
liy Dr. Ai.i f.n. l>mo. 2s, Grf. 

CONSTRUCTIVE LATIN EXERCISES, for teaching the Elements 
of the Language on a system of Analysis and Synthesis, with 
copious Vocabularies. By John Robson, B.A. 12mo. 6s. d/. cloth. 

LATIN AUTHORS, selected for the use of Schools; containing j>or- 
tions of Pha-drus, Ovid's Metamorphoses, Virgil's ^'Eneiil. Ca•^ar, 
and Tacitus. 12mo. 3*. M. 

GREEK AUTHORS, selected for the use of Schools; containing 
portions of Lucian's Dialogues, Anacreon, Homer's Iliad, Xeiu.ipiion's 
Memorabilia, and Herodotus. r2mo. Zs. 6rf. 

ANABASIS OF CYRUS, Book I., Ch. 1 to C. Literal and Inter- 
linear Translation of the First Chapter, and a Lexicon t<^ the wliule, 
in which the words are divided into their several Parts, an<i deriva- 
tives are collected imder their respective Roots. By J. T. V. IL\ui)y, 
B.A. 12mo. '6s. 6J. 

LATIUM'S ENOTTSH LANGUAGE. Second edition. Sxo.los. 

ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Third 



ELEitENTAEY 

edition. l2mo. 4«. 6J. 
FIRST LESSONS IN 

Ladies Schools. Fcap 8vo. 



ENGLISH GRAJ^IM.Ui for 



■ " for Commercial Schools. 

for Classical Schools. 

OUTLINES OF LCXJIC .U'PLIED TO GILYMM AR 

AND ETYMOLOGY. 12mo. is. lid. 



TAYLOR, WaLTO.N & MABERLY, 

28, UPPEK cowep. street, & 27, ivy l,vne, paternostep. row. 

•^ ^-^ • CXI 

:'!^Xii^Xi^x^Xii^Xi^X!!^x^^^ wy w vws^^ 




It 






'^i^''M^^ LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



003 036 142 8 # 



"^ 






